Home

ZyXEL 802.11g User's Manual

1. 30201008 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201009 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201010 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 30201011 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 2 30201012 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201013 IP Alias 1 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201014 IP Alias 2 lt O No 1 Yes gt 0 30201015 IP Address 0 0 0 0 30201016 IP Subnet Mask 0 30201017 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30201018 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30201019 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 30201020 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 2 30201021 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201022 IP Alias 2 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 4 30201023 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 30201024 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 2 30201025 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 3 30201026 IP Alias 2 Outgoing protocol filters 256 Set 4 Table 146 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 Internet Access Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 40000000 Configured lt O No 1 1 Yes gt P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 146 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continue
2. M i 143 2 11 NAT DEMUS sicrie aaa ERA 143 SNR d NE M 144 S T 5 How MAT WOKS cousine ieuna Leve a dcr Rui dub Eas tied Ud iba vdd bv LEEREN v 144 SL NAT SEES sau mem eee On EH er ee oea ie n ER HERR Re ee ence meen l uon 144 8 1 9 MAT Mapping TYPES zenc oH D EE E RO Eo mina nio inna E E ER e sPME 145 9 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NT 12er tritt prr at npn ont hd rtt dinde 146 SERES roi coU TRE 146 OA NAT General SETUP rareori 147 Ae PONTON nM p 148 9 5 1 Default Server IP Agrees sccatsiatccscentnsosscctsienccnanenicaes Ma cceamteieecnsdheweeeaniaone 148 9 5 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port NUMDErS iuuat torta rnnt ruht barn vanes 148 9 5 3 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example ssssssss 149 96 SAN Pon Ole RI o oo o 1 00 1mm 149 s MNEIUMU I uinlili 2e e 150 Ea Peres WA PUN ERN S T D 151 9 7 1 Address Mapping Rule EXE ioter rrt pa teen poe EIS TRI ain ran ENNE KECE A EEEE OERA 153 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Parn V 0 0 155 Chapter 10 1 157 OT Ue E912 MO c 157 pec is Fite T UON 157 10 2 1 Packet Filtering FIFSNIBS quecescoaebetad npn P Sir E SH 3 SU RICO ERR qa Ra ata 157 T0 6 2 ApplicalionJevel Firewalls uos cse ior obA EHE p HR REPE TUER CEDE EUR E REIS SNR ERR CIE CE ERO iaai 158 10 2 3 Statef
3. Table 145 Menu 3 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 30200001 DHCP lt 0 None 0 1 Server 2 Relay gt 30200002 Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 30200003 Size of Client IP Pool 32 30200004 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 30200005 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 30200006 Remote DHCP Server 0 0 0 0 30200008 IP Address 172 21 2 200 30200009 IP Subnet Mask 16 30200010 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30200011 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30200012 Multicast O IGMP v2 zu 1 IGMP v1 2 None 30200013 IP Policies Set 1 1 12 256 30200014 IP Policies Set 2 1 12 256 30200015 IP Policies Set 3 1 12 256 30200016 IP Policies Set 4 1 12 256 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup FIN F PVA INPUT 30201001 IP Alias 1 lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt 30201002 IP Address 0 0 0 0 30201003 IP Subnet Mask 0 30201004 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 30201005 Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 30201006 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 1 30201007 IP Alias 1 Incoming protocol filters 256 Set 2 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 145 Menu 3
4. 74 Figure Eugenio nep Tm 75 Figure 41 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information sseeneee 75 Figure 42 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration essseeeeeeenn ene 76 Figure 43 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete eese enne ten nennen tnn nan nena TT Figure 44 Example of Trafic Shaping e 85 Figure 45 Interiet Connection PPPOE ui aeui berba citra ada rk ii RE Rh Er di nk n Et E RR etd 87 Figure 46 Advanced Internet Connection Setup iiseice riter o tra pere PRPE Hu FEET EPA RE ERUAN EN ERE PEUE FERE EIXORR RR UEE A 89 Figure 4r Mops Conec ion 2iduxeiest unte bip taa n bet intei vedi is p erp cR pd i Pond r pe IN 90 Figura 45 More Connections EIE 5r bor anaa utadd alu a cet Rupee t Eaa E Ee EE etd 92 Figure 49 More Connections Advanced Setup uias eec cicer eerte erp tete veau prre raa a pL Ibn sa pL Pec E E ede 94 Figure 50 Trafic Redirect EXIMPIE 4 isstisexzecc inter t EIER PLI Eo EP ORA REPRE E FPE OR EPOR URBE H IS PPS ORA 95 Figure S1 Talic Redirect LAN SOUP eT 95 Figure 52 Urano s Ee ci e 96 Figure 53 LAM and WAN IP Addresses Liuius t ead ekua Lagu agua Ln ph ie RR EAR R E ERR RADI NEENA EEA LR KE REL EAA 99 Figuio ao my Il eee ds leti pe ter Pelei uad oer rive ede aveo uberes tad tun uet tue Vni beds 103 zo T Mr M 104 Figure 56 Advanced LAN Setup 2c cete eU ee Ea eROUU
5. Research Priority 5 2048 kbps Suppose that all of the classes except for the administration class need more bandwidth Each class gets up to its budgeted bandwidth The administration class only uses 1024 kbps of its budgeted 2048 kbps The sales and marketing are first to get extra bandwidth because they have the highest priority 6 If they each require 1536 kbps or more of extra bandwidth the P 560HWP Dx divides the total 3072 kbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth equally between the sales and marketing departments 1536 kbps extra to each for a total of 3584 kbps for each because they both have the highest priority level Research requires more bandwidth but only gets its budgeted 2048 kbps because all of the unbudgeted and unused bandwidth goes to the higher priority sales and marketing classes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 15 6 2 2 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth The following table shows the amount of bandwidth that each class gets Table 88 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration 1024 kbps Sales 3072 kbps Marketing 3072 kbps Research 3072 kbps Suppose that all of the Each class gets up classes except for the administration class need more bandwidth to its budgeted bandwidth The administr
6. Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your P 660HWP Dx supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the P 660HWP Dx through the network The P 660HWP Dx supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two SNMPv2 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation BES SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration Figure 140 SNMP Management Model Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device MANAGER An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resid
7. LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Do NOT turn off the P 660HWP Dx while firmware upload is in progress After you see the Firmware Upload in Progress screen wait two minutes before logging into the P 660HWP Dx again Figure 166 Firmware Upload In Progress Firmware Upload In Progress Do not Turn Off the Device Please Wait Please wait for the device to finish restarting PWR LED is on steady This should take about two minutes the device The P 660HWP Dx automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 167 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Figure 168 Error Message System Upload Firmware upload error The uploaded file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file Click Help for
8. Trigger dial This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are allowed to initiate Disabled calls Disabled means that NetBIOS packets are blocked from initiating calls NetBIOS Filter Configuration Syntax sys filter netbios config type lt on off gt where type lt on off gt Example commands sys filter netbios config 0 on sys filter netbios config 3 on sys filter netbios config 4 off Identify which NetBIOS filter numbered 0 3 to configure 0 Between LAN and WAN 3 IPSec packet pass through 4 Trigger Dial For type 0 and 1 use on to enable the filter and block NetBIOS packets Use off to disable the filter and forward NetBIOS packets For type 3 use on to block NetBIOS packets from being sent through a VPN connection Use off to allow NetBIOS packets to be sent through a VPN connection For type 4 use on to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate dial backup calls Use off to block NetBIOS packets from initiating dial backup calls This command blocks LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN NetBIOS packets This command blocks IPSec NetBIOS packets This command stops NetBIOS commands from initiating calls P 660HWP Dx User s Guide P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Triangle Route The Ideal Setup When the firewall is on your P 660HWP Dx acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet In an ideal network topology all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes
9. Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider ww DynDNS ORG Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name User Name Password Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option Only applies to custom DNS IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Address C Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address C Use specified IP Address 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 97 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic Select this check box to use dynamic DNS DNS Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Dynamic DNS Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS Type service provider Host Name Type the domain name assigned to your P 660HWP Dx by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Option Enable off line This option is available when Custom DNS is selected in the DDNS Type field option Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL that you can specify while you are off line IP Address Update Policy Use WAN IP Select this option to update the IP address of the host name s to the WAN IP Addre
10. LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 28 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP ff Internet Configuration Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP address First DNS Server Second DNS Server 172 21 2 3 158 95 1 1 0 0 0 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 11 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL DESCRIPTION Obtain an IP A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not Address fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Automatically Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address Static IP Select Static IP Address if your ISP gives you a fixed IP address Address IP Address Enter your ISP assigned IP address Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP You must specify a
11. The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port ip spoofing WAN ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 icmp echo ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 syn flood TCP The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack ports scan TCP The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack teardrop TCP The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack teardrop UDP The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack teardrop ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 illegal command TCP The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack NetBIOS TCP The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack ip spoofing no routing entry TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack ip spoofing no routing entry ICMP type d code d The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack vulnerability ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 traceroute ICMP type d code d The
12. Network Remote Stations Setting Remote Stations In The Same Network Network Password Login Remote Device Access Key Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Network gt Powerline gt Remote Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Remote This section describes the configuration of the other HomePlug AV Stations Setting adapters on your power line network Remote Stations In This field shows the MAC addresses of the HomePlug AV adapters The Same Network on your network These adapters all share the Network Password entered in the Local Settings section Select one of the MAC addresses listed to begin the configuration of an adapter and your powerline network Network Password Type a new network password for the adapter you have selected Ensure the password is different from the default HomePlugAV password P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Powerline LABEL DESCRIPTION Login Remote Type the Device Access Key for the device you have selected The Device Access Key Device Access Key is listed on the device itself Apply Click Apply to set the new Network Password The MAC address of the device will disappear from the list until all devices have had their Network Passwords changed Cancel Click this button to cancel any changes you have made 8 5 Powerline Network Status Use this screen to check the status
13. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 72 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This field displays general information about the certificate CA signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Self signed means that the certificate s owner signed the certificate not a certification authority X 509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU T X 509 recommendation that defines the formats for public key certificates Version This field displays the X 509 version number Serial Number This field displays the certificate s identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the P 660HWP Dx Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as Common Name Organizational Unit Organization and Country With self signed certificates this is the same as the Subject Name field Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate The P 660HWP Dx uses rsa pkcs1 sha1 RSA public private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm Some certification aut
14. SS Ss UU 100M Full Duplex 791 529 0 125M G4 418 765 o OMbps OMbps 0 o 0 The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 7 Status Packet Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION System Monitor System up Time This is the elapsed time the system has been up Current Date Time This field displays your P 6G60HWP Dx s present date and time CPU Usage This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization Memory Usage This field specifies the percentage of memory utilization WAN Port Statistics Link Status This is the status of your WAN link WAN IP Address This is the IP address of your WAN Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your P 660HWP Dx Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your P 660HWP Dx Node Link This field displays the remote node index number and link type Link types are PPPoA ENET RFC 1483 and PPPoE Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port Errors This field displays the n
15. This field displays the certificate index number The certificates are listed in alphabetical order Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country With self signed certificates this is the same information as in the Subject field Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired CRL Issuer This field displays Yes if the certification authority issues Certificate Revocation Lists for the certificates that it has issued and you have selected the Issues certificate revocation lists CRL check box in the certificate s details screen to have the P 660HWP Dx check the C
16. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 1 3 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP Selecting RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead 0 octets However if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future it may be safer to select PPPoA encapsulation instead of RFC 1483 so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later 5 1 3 3 Scenario 3 Multiple VCs If you have an equal number or more of VCs than the number of protocols then select RFC 1483 encapsulation and VC based multiplexing 5 1 4 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers assigned to you The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Please see the appendix for more information 5 1 5 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway 5 1 5 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A If you have a static IP then you
17. This command removes the specified rule ina firewall configuration set P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default LES Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 214 Pop up Blocker Mail and News Pop up Blocker D Manage Add ons Synchronize Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled Figure 215 Internet Options Privacy
18. Any protocol that operates in this way must be supported on a case by case basis You can use the web configurator s Custom Ports feature to do this P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 10 6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall Change the default password via CLI Command Line Interpreter or web configurator Limit who can telnet into your router Don t enable any local service such as SNMP or NTP that you don t use Any enabled service could present a potential security risk A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network For local services that are enabled protect against misuse Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active Keep the firewall in a secured locked room 10 6 1 Security In General You can never be too careful Factors outside your firewall filtering or NAT can cause security breaches Below are some generalizations about what you can do to minimize them Encourage your company or organization to develop a comprehensive security plan Good network administration takes into account what hackers can do and prepares against attacks The best defense against hackers and crackers is information Educate all employees
19. Figure 125 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Server gt Add ccccsscccccesesscceeeeetseneeceeensaneeeeeettaees 216 Figure 126 Example of Static Routing TODOLOGV ss secccscisscrenecessseansveesseeencects E nna ott tuta ree ha Et tige 219 Figure 127 Static ROUTE cn cist sone 220 xcu E pecudes E eec 221 Figure 129 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example sese 224 Figure 130 Bandwidth Management SUMIMANY iuiiiessceuss esee terreas ai tbe auusa suba iisa iia 228 Figure 131 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup eeeeeeseeeeeesesee e rennen nhan retta ka Etna a a a nasa aA 229 Figure 132 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field 12 rrr pr et I ER Era per ba E eek trE Pape xn er EAR RERUIE 230 Figure 133 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration eese eene nennen 231 Figure 134 Bandwidth Management Monitor sssseseeene enne nnns 234 Figure 135 Dynami DNG e M 236 Figure 135 Remote Management WIW uuu uec pectet rre annsan Ho PX RERO d 338 FOR EXE Fa dS Etpe 240 Figure 137 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP NetWork 1 52 retenir rera cetera tet rera 9 aa istrina arnika 241 Figure 138 Remote Management Telnet iussa ieadt rie cta turre naiiai saaria 242 Figure 139 Remote Management FTP Lui eene nutri NASR raa ga n ta dic pa eda iuda 243 Figure 140 SNMP Management Model ice tont scr pb etur ete aom eme rp
20. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART VI Maintenance and Troubleshooting System Use this screen to configure the P 660HWP Dx s time and date settings 19 1 General Setup 19 1 1 General Setup and System Name General Setup contains administrative and system related information System Name is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name In Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name n Windows 2000 click Start Settings Control Panel and then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the P 660HWP Dx System Name 19 1 2 General Setup The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name the domain name can be assigned from the P 660HWP Dx via DHCP Click Maintenance gt System to open the General screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 19 System Figure 160 S
21. Triple Play The P 660HWP Dx is capable of simultaneously transferring data voice and video over the Internet IP Policy Routing IPPR Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Table 137 Wireless Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Wireless LAN The P 660HWP Dx is fully compatible with both IEEE 802 11b and IEEE 802 11g standards and can support both kinds of clients on the same network WEP Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy allows the encryption of data before its transmission over networks Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA is part of the IEEE 802 11i security specifications standard and offers user authentication and data encryption WPA2 WPA2 is an improvement on WPA with enhanced data encryption user authentication and key management WPA2 PSK WPA 2 PSK WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK allow you to implement the superior WPA and WPA2 encryption standards without using a RADIUS server Instead WPA 2 PSK uses pre shared keys PSKs to authenticate devices on the wireless network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting FEATURE DESCRIPTION Outpu
22. 22 2 DSL Line Diagnostic Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic gt DSL Line to open the screen shown next Figure 175 Diagnostic DSL Line DSL Line o RIXUN Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully ATM Status ATM Loopback Test DSL Line Status Reset ADSL Line Capture All Logs The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 134 Diagnostic DSL Line LABEL DESCRIPTION ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status ATM Loopback Test Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VCls before you begin this test The P 660HWP Dx sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the P 660HWP Dx The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network DSL Line Status Click this button to view the DSL port s line operating values and line bit allocation Reset ADSL Line Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully Capture All Logs Click this button to display all logs generated with the DSL line P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestion
23. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Tables Table 125 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes sese 285 jr catorce Seting Noles We P 285 ur merge sl aee eem 286 Tabio 128 SoysloH Mle el aera eres re nieder pU cia adde UE ERR a CUN A OPE S M c uad Dota 287 Table 129 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Typ S aukkrbnisenskrp eu kp E In EE RREPEX NR EK En EnaA XP PEU ENE 287 Table 130 Fintiware WD GAGS c 289 Table 131 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration u cctcc ccc ceeneeecceaeeeenneeeaneteaneeeatennaaeenanssnaneeenansnnnee 291 Table 132 Maintenance Restore Configuration sdisacisiaiieasceneaseesanecaiesanienndaienameeasieaaemeddieesareniuenaeineds 292 Tabie Pee Diagnosi Gnora uode rn d tet Pe Te tet rete oia bad e Cas des p i bere err 295 Table 194 Diagnostic DSL LING ares peor eR op PCE iiai edu e etre ipd dad ei error dod add iod Rd 296 Table 135 Hardware SpecihcatignS e 305 Tabie 136 FT SACI CAGE A 305 Table 137 Wireless Firmware Specifications casssseiscisianscatasianedavessnannecaneacneadcnasthopniaasastonsedeassionantouaneas 307 TARDE TSE Standards UPPOMEG srccseicduereccdedneesscuscdvndeoesid dcisaxuiagbetsentaddleecannaeniedseaniloualumiede donier Aib 308 Toe hore sem dee ie scr N 315 Taule TAU Wireless Securiy Lovells ss ciseasdaiinoievhitunnaintelulcemtanpeedanaeeaianatriaiudaniuaiensienennaantints 316 Table 141 Comparison of EAP Aut
24. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Customized Services LABEL DESCRIPTION No This is the number of your customized port Click a rule s number of a service to go toa screen where you can configure or edit a customized service See Section 11 6 3 on page 56 for more information Name This is the name of your customized service Protocol This shows the IP protocol TCP UDP or TCP UDP that defines your customized service Port This is the port number or range that defines your customized service Back Click Back to return the Firewall Edit Rule screen 11 6 3 Configuring a Customized Service Click a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to create a new custom port or edit an existing one This action displays the following screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Refer to Section 10 1 on page 35 for more information Figure 101 Firewall Configure Customized Services Config Service Name Service Type TCP v Port Configuration Type Single Port Range Port Number From 0 To o Back Apply Cancel Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Firewall Configure Customized Services LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Type a unique name for your custom port Service Type Choose the IP port TCP UDP or TCP UDP that defines your customize
25. cccsseseeccesesseneeceenseneeeceensnneecueessnneeenenseenseeeenenaes 139 Table 46 Network Powerline gt Status ccncciaccisiediciacadeincdaniadensdacisiopaeadiencaunedieaaianeeiaiemnuds 140 Tablet NAT eS eioi a a a Fo Eb otc d m Dc o n m dre 143 Table SS NAT Mapping DVDS issuer POTERE ETE EORR DR URS Pw kanad aia ZR bI aadatan Do ei GU a 146 DEB UR UNI M 147 Table 50 Servicos and Por NumDETS 1 1 rr ost 1I SE PEE EIER Ia ard dee ERR HI An SE tcd bsec et 148 Table 3T WAT POR FOWA decida xE ETHER EFE PORE EERH II ETE NO PUE XE FRU HU N 150 teble 52 Port Forwarding Rule Setup 124 cei iiec ctii dea crtid ana eb bbb dante baden e kl Fu sarta bbd aeons cb bk d aida 151 Tahle 53 Address Mapping RUES ivsnik ede enne hi re Le arbe t E ri dna ci pn 152 Table 94 Edit Address Mapping EB 2 retta reiten th PPS cas debe du a Pro Ia Pope S err bete be bins 153 Table 55 Camion P POrIS 2 or ppc dde Ponte tbe EISE PRISE EAMDEM o PCT a EI ZEER AE PER S MEER A 159 Table 56 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts Lui ee earth anat EP R RA Ra RR A aaa RA daa E KB RA aqu aA 162 Table Sf Legal NEIBIOS Commande A annaa aia N A 162 Table 58 Legal Shi Pomme C oor s mee LE Doa cael old aaah ee RON Exod v ton RA 162 Table 59 Firewall Gongral ioa ibn rtt bo vv reap A e IR ele 173 Tobie 60 Firewall RUES e 174 Table 51 Freva ISIE RUIE saasaa aaien a a E EE aN aa naaa aada Eana a veces 177 Tablo 92 Customized Sonigo
26. 7 Turn on your P 660HWP Dx and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 Inthe Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme 1 Click start Start in Windows 2000 NT Settings Control Panel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 192 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer S Outlook Express WV Paint 88 Files and Settings Transfer W X ERY Command Prompt E My Music a Acrobat Reader 4 0 Tour Windows xP R Windows Movie Maker ce Printei All Programs gt untitled Paint 7 My Documents 2 My Recent Documents gt e My Pictures g My Computer d E Control Panel Help and Support og Off 0 Turn OFF Computer 2 Inthe Control Panel double click Network Connections Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT amp Control Panel File Edit Tools Help View Favorites Figure 193 Windows XP Control Panel s d JO Search E Folders E Address gt Control Panel Vg Control Panel Je Switch to Category View See Also A Windows Update Game Controllers 3
27. Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 7 Configuring DNS Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Refer to the chapter on LAN for background information To change your P 660HWP Dx s DNS settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt DNS The screen appears as shown Use this screen to set from which IP address the P 660HWP Dx will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your P 660HWP Dx s DNS settings P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration Figure 142 Remote Management DNS q Note DNS DNS Port 53 Access Status LAN Secured Client IP C al Selected 0 0 0 0 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Remote Management DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Port The DNS service port number is 53 Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may send DNS queries to the P 660HWP Dx Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the P 660HWP Dx Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the P 660HWP Dx Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specif
28. Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size between 256 and 2432 bytes that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS CTS value see previously you set then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver Short and Long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data All IEEE 802 11b g compliant wireless adapters support long preamble but not all support short preamble Select Long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Select Short preamble if you are sure the wireless adapters support it an
29. Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet gt zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups 3 Click Apply to save this setting Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 216 Internet Options Privacy Internet Options 3 peme General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet MER zone Medium privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable Cc information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit co
30. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66499 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix L Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel
31. Sustain Cell Rate see SCR switch 305 SYN Flood 160 161 SYN ACK 160 syntax conventions 4 Syslog 182 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index system errors 271 system name 265 266 System Parameter Table Generator see SPTGEN system restart 293 system timeout 240 T TCP maximum incomplete 187 TCP security 164 TCP IP 159 160 341 TCP IP address 295 teardrop 160 Telnet 73 241 temperature 305 Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP 320 TFTP restrictions 240 three way handshake 160 threshold values 186 time and date settings 267 timeout 240 tools 289 TR 069 307 traceroute 162 trademarks 385 traffic redirect 95 97 307 traffic shaping 84 transmission rates 35 triangle route 383 solutions 384 U UBR 89 94 UDP ICMP security 165 Unspecified Bit Rate see UBR UPnP 251 application 251 Forum 252 security issues 251 UPnP installation 253 Windows Me 253 Windows XP 254 upper layer protocols 164 165 upstream 35 36 user authentication 114 local user database 114 RADIUS server 114 weaknesses 114 user name 236 V Vantage CNM Access 307 Variable Bit Rate see VBR VBR 89 94 VC 82 VC based multiplexing 82 VCI 83 Virtual Channel Identifier see VCI virtual circuit see VC Virtual Path Identifier see VPI Voice over IP see VoIP VoIP 74 VPI 83 W wall mounting 305 WAN 81 backup 95 WAN setup 81 WAN to LAN rules 172 warranty 387 note 387 web configu
32. The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP is only implemented with the IP network protocol IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP Gateway field in the second wizard screen You can get this information from your ISP 5 1 1 2 PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP PPPoE is an IETF standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable etc connection For the service provider PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example RADIUS One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPoE directly on the P 660HWP Dx rather than individual computers the computers on t
33. synchronize packet to the receiving server The receiver sends back an ACK acknowledgment packet and its own SYN and then the initiator responds with an ACK acknowledgment After this handshake a connection is established SYN Attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN ACK response While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN ACK it queues up all outstanding SYN ACK responses on what is known as a backlog queue SYN ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer which is set at relatively long intervals terminates the three way handshake Once the queue is full the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests making the system unavailable for legitimate users P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls Figure 94 SYN Flood Client Server SYN SYN SYN SYN SYN ACK SYN ACK SYN ACK SYN ACK Ina LAND Attack hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the targeted system This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to Itself 7 Abrute force attack such as a Smurf attack targets a feature in the IP specification known as directed or subnet broadcasting to quickly flood the target network with useless data A Smurf hacker floods a router w
34. 0 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210201013 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210201014 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Act Not lt 1 check 1 Match next 2 forward 3 drop gt Menu 21 1 2 2 Filter set 2 rule 2 FI F PVA INPUT 210202001 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Type lt 0 none 2 TCP L2 IP 210202002 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 210202003 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Protocol 6 210202004 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest IP 0 0 0 0 address 210202005 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest 0 Subnet Mask 210202006 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest Port 138 210202007 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Dest Port lt 0 none 1 equal 1 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210202008 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src IP 0 0 0 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 150 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 2 continued 210202009 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Subnet 0 Mask 210202010 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Port 0 210202011 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Src Port lt 0 none 1 equal 0 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210202013 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210202014 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 2 Act Not 1
35. 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix L Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com
36. Bridged MAC Address Your P 660HWP Dx may also connect to an Ethernet network such as a LAN or the Internet Your powerline network will then be able to connect to an Ethernet network through your P 660HWP Dx So the Bridged MAC Address refers to the MAC address which your P 660HWP Dx uses when connecting to an Ethernet network and transmitting to your powerline network from an Ethernet network Tx Rate This is the rate the Local Station transmits data to another adapter on your powerline network The rate is given in the following format application data transmission rate raw data transmission rate Application data reflects more accurately how fast devices are transmitting application relevant traffic for example Internet Protocol IP traffic Raw data refers to the whole payload of the packets transmitted across the powerline network Rx Rate This is the rate the Local Station receives data from another adapter on your powerline network The rate is given in the following format application data transmission rate raw data transmission rate Application data reflects more accurately how fast devices are transmitting application relevant traffic for example Internet Protocol IP traffic Raw data refers to the whole payload of the packets transmitted across the powerline network Refresh Click the Refresh button to update the information in this screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide C
37. CA server url gt The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s IP address cannot be resolved Revd ca cert lt subject name gt The router received a certification authority certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd user cert lt subject name gt The router received a user certificate with subject name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd CRL lt size gt lt issuer name gt The router received a CRL Certificate Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd ARL lt size gt lt issuer name gt The router received an ARL Authority Revocation List with size and issuer name as recorded from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th received ca cert The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server received user cert whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to decode th The router received a corrupted CRL Certificate Revocation List fro
38. DoS 158 159 187 basics 159 types 160 downstream 35 36 DS Field 230 DS field 230 DSCPs 230 DSL reinitialize 296 DSLAM 35 dynamic DNS 235 dynamic WEP key exchange 319 DYNDNS wildcard 235 E EAP Authentication 317 ECHO 148 E Mail 133 e mail 73 log example 274 Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol see ENET ENCAP encapsulation 81 82 PPP over Ethernet 81 PPPoA 82 RFC 1483 82 encryption 114 117 320 and local user database 115 key 115 WPA compatible 115 ENET ENCAP 81 ESS 312 ESSID 116 Ethernet adapter card 341 Extended Service Set IDentification see ESSID Extended Service Set See ESS 312 Extended wireless security 70 F factory defaults 291 293 fairness based scheduler 225 FCC interference statement 385 File Transfer Protocol see FTP filename extension 289 finger 148 firewall access methods 169 address type 177 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index alerts 172 anti probing 185 commands 369 creating editing rules 175 custom ports 178 enabling 172 firewall vs filters 167 guidelines for enhancing security 166 introduction 158 LAN to WAN rules 172 policies 169 rule checklist 170 rule configuration key fields 171 rule logic 170 rule security ramifications 170 services 183 types 157 when to use 167 firmware 35 289 upgrade 289 upload 289 upload error 290 fragmentation threshold 314 FTP 73 148 240 242 restrictions 240 full rate 39 H half open sessions 187 help 47 hi
39. H 323 or FTP at the application layer A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream When the P 660HWP Dx registers with the SIP register server the SIP ALG translates the P 660HWP Dx s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your P 660HWP Dx 1s behind a SIP ALG P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 9 4 NAT General Setup You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up SUA NAT to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the P 660HWP Dx Click Network gt NAT to open the following screen Figure 86 NAT General General NAT Setup Active Network Address Translation NAT sua Only Full Feature Max NAT Firewall Session Per User 12 IV Enable SIP ALG Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 NAT General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable NAT Network Address Translation NAT SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your P 660HWP Dx Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your P 660HWP Dx Max NAT When computers use peer to peer applications such as file sharing applications they Firewall need to establish NAT sessions
40. IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 RIP Direction None 7 RIP Version via z IP Alias 2 I IP Alias 2 IP ddress 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 RIP Direction None z RIP Version wa z Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 LAN IP Alias LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Alias 1 2 Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the P 660HWP Dx IP Address Enter the IP address of your P 560HWP Dx in dotted decimal notation Alternatively click the right mouse button to copy and or paste the IP address IP Subnet Mask Your P 660HWP Dx will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the P 660HWP Dx RIP Direction RIP Routing Information Protocol RFC 1058 and RFC 1389 allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only Out Only When set to Both or Out Only the P 660HWP Dx will broadcast its routing table periodically When set to Both or In Only it will incorporate the RIP information that it receives when set to None it will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received RIP Version The RIP Version field controls the format and the
41. Inaclass B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID Inaclass C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID The following table shows the network number and host ID arrangement for classes A B and C Table 154 Classes of IP Addresses IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C Network number Network number Network number Host ID An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network Therefore to determine the total number of hosts allowed in a network deduct two as shown next A class C address 1 host octet 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 2 host octets 16 host bits can have 316 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 3 host octets 24 host bits can have 27 2 hosts or approximately 16 million hosts P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix E IP Subnetting IP Address Classes and Network ID The value of the first octet of an IP address determines the class of an address Class A addresses have a 0 in the leftmost bit Class B addresses have a 1 in the leftmost bit and a 0 in the next leftmost bit Class C ad
42. Restrict use of certain protocols such as Telnet to authorized users on the LAN These custom rules work by evaluating the network traffic s Source IP address Destination IP address IP protocol type and comparing these to rules set by the administrator The ability to define firewall rules is a very powerful tool Using custom rules it is possible to disable all firewall protection or block all access to the Internet Use extreme caution when creating or deleting firewall rules Test changes after creating them to make sure they work correctly Below is a brief technical description of how these connections are tracked Connections may either be defined by the upper protocols for instance TCP or by the P 660HWP Dx itself as with the virtual connections created for UDP and ICMP 10 5 3 TCP Security The P 660HWP Dx uses state information embedded in TCP packets The first packet of any new connection has its SYN flag set and its ACK flag cleared these are initiation packets All packets that do not have this flag structure are called subsequent packets since they represent data that occurs later in the TCP stream If an initiation packet originates on the WAN this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the Internet into the LAN Except in a few special cases see Upper Layer Protocols shown next these packets are dropped and logged P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls If an in
43. Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 157 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 255 255 255 240 128 1111 0000 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1000 255 255 255 252 130 1111 1100 The first mask shown is the class C natural ma
44. The QoS screen by default allows you to automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of the packets it sends 7 8 1 ToS Type of Service and WMM QoS ToS defines the DS Differentiated Service field in the IP packet header The ToS value of outgoing packets is between 0 and 255 0 is the lowest priority WMM QoS checks the ToS in the header of transmitted data packets It gives the application a priority according to this number If the ToS is not specified then transmitted data is treated as normal or best effort traffic P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network gt Wireless LAN gt QoS The following screen displays Figure 76 Wireless LAN QoS Qos V Enable WMM QoS WMM QoS Policy won CO Un RON e pe Name Service dest Port Priority Modify Application Priority w RRQARAARARR Eb B ED E E B E B E GB Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 42 Wireless Lan QoS LABEL DESCRIPTION QoS Enable WMM QoS Select the check box to enable WMM QoS on the P 660HWP Dx WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the P 660HWP Dx automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends Select Application Priority from the drop down list box to display a table of application name
45. make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address See Section 6 2 1 on page 101 Your P 660HWP Dx is a DHCP server by default Ifthere is no DHCP server on your network make sure your computer s IP address is in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx See Section 6 2 1 on page 101 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 23 Troubleshooting 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the P 660HWP Dx with the default IP address See Section 2 3 on page 46 6 Ifthe problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the P 660HWP Dx using another service such as Telnet If you can access the P 660HWP Dx check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the P 660HWP Dx does not respond to HTTP If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly use a computer that is connected to a LAN ETHERNET port I can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the P 660HWP Dx 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default password is 1234 This field is case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 Youcannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the P 660HWP Dx Log out of the P 660HWP Dx in the other session or ask the person who is logged in to log out Turn the P 660HWP Dx off and on 4 Ifthis does not
46. none 1 equal 0 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210102013 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210102014 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Act Not Match 1 check 1 next 2 forward 3 drop gt Table 150 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 2 Menu 21 1 filter set 2 FIN FN PVA INPUT 210200001 Filter Set 2 Nam lt Str gt NetBIOS_WAN Menu 21 1 2 1 Filter set 2 rule 1 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 150 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 2 continued address FI F PVA INPUT 210201001 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Type 0 none 2 TCP E 2 IP 210201002 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt E 210201003 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Protocol 6 210201004 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest IP 0 0 0 0 address 210201005 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest 0 Subnet Mask 210201006 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest Port 137 210201007 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Dest Port lt 0 none 1 equal 1 Comp 2 not equal 3 less 4 g reater gt 210201008 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src IP 0 0 0 0 address 210201009 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Subnet 0 Mask 210201010 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Port 0 210201011 IP Filter Set 2 Rule 1 Src Port lt 0 none 1 equal
47. not including spaces Property Default self signed certificate which signs the imported remote host Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx use this certificate to sign the trusted remote host certificates that you import to the P 660HWP Dx This check box is only available with self signed certificates If this check box is already selected you cannot clear it in this screen you must select this check box in another self signed certificate s details screen This certificates automatically clears the check box in the details screen of the certificate that was previously set to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate and the certificate itself If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority it may be the only certification authority in the list along with the certificate itself If the certificate is a self signed certificate the certificate itself is the only one in the list The P 660HWP Dx does not trust the certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked Certificate Information These read only fields display detailed information about the certificate
48. onfiguration Network Ez LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI Tx NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCPAP gt 3Com EtherLink Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1 Inthe Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Configuring 1 Inthe Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab f your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Ad
49. open sessions The P 660HWP Dx continues to delete half open sessions as necessary until the rate of new connection attempts drops below this number 80 existing half open sessions One Minute High This is the rate of new half open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half open sessions When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number the P 660HWP Dx deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts 100 half open sessions per minute The above numbers cause the P 660HWP Dx to start deleting half open sessions when more than 100 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute and to stop deleting half open sessions when fewer than 80 session establishment attempts have been detected in the last minute Maximum Incomplete Low This is the number of existing half open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half open sessions The P 660HWP Dx continues to delete half open requests as necessary until the number of existing half open sessions drops below this number 80 existing half open sessions P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Table 66 Firewall Threshold continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DEFAULT VALUES Maximum Incomplete High This is the number of existing half open sessions that causes the firewall to start deleting half open sessions When the numb
50. through the P 660HWP Dx to protect your LAN against attacks Figure 222 Ideal Setup WAN nimio sium UN E Internet cs S lt gt The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices Some companies have more than one route to one or more ISPs If the alternate gateway is on the LAN and it s IP address is in the same subnet the triangle route problem may occur The steps below describe the triangle route problem 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The P 660HWP Dx reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN 3 The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the P 660HWP Dx As a result the P 660HWP Dx resets the connection as the connection has not been acknowledged Appendix J Triangle Route Figure 223 Triangle Route Problem LAN SER Li lis ISP B Internet 3 i pore ISP 1 The Triangle Route Solutions This section presents you two solutions to the triangle route problem IP Aliasing IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface Your P 660HWP Dx supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the P 660HWP Dx being
51. thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 9 1 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The P 660HWP Dx keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this Figure 84 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global IP Address IP Address WAN 192 168 1 10 IGA 1 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 13 E 192168112 IGA3 192 168 1 13 IGA4 g m 4 x 192 168 1 12 192 168 1 10 2c Internet Nm Ed i 192 168 1 11 a Inside Local Inside Global 192 168 1 10 Addresses ILA Addresses IGA 9 1 4 NAT Application The following figure
52. 00 00 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 9 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 00 00 00 00 00 00 13 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 16 00 00 00 00 00 00 17 00 00 00 00 00 00 18 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 21 00 00 00 00 00 00 22 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 00 00 00 25 00 00 00 00 00 00 26 00 00 00 00 00 00 27 00 00 00 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this menu Table 39 MAC Address Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Active MAC Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering Filter Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table Select Deny to block access to the P G60HWP Dx MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the P 660HWP Dx Select Allow to permit access to the P 660HWP Dx MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 51 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 39 MAC Address Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Set This is the index number of the MAC address MAC Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless client that are allowed or denied access to Address the P 660HWP Dx in these address fields Enter the MAC addresses i
53. 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 160 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 1s the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address
54. 120 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 7 4 5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup Lusso reete EE o Ea RP PERI RII dI DR o t E Lx n4 122 rcs T NC 123 Pel train OWS Ul erm 123 7 5 2 I DTIST usa oeDadctices E deti is ates ee det eaten ieee 125 Toa Nolar on OTIS M 126 alc sell e 127 nba i rss rU UPS 128 RE eoim e ATTI T UT UM TU 128 P eae s ES dI su e DP 128 Pil Ec MASTER TT UU LL hvends 129 DE E cic p o ara E O 130 81 T99 Typo of Service and WMM QOS 1uiissccssuiecezi pedet aL ra paa nh N 131 78 8 Application Priority Configuration 152 cipere pA Ee E Faro aU BREL UHR EMEERIo PIE IE Ee eR ER SEE RE ERSMEEURUE 132 Chapter 8 Powellli iei cn fanaa ludice tu felisi dU mi mad en es tici nM o Mu PM lA E Pu UI DER NER NEM NRR 135 SES c TOIT ULL 135 5 2 Privacy and Powerline Adapters quise ebisesk rk ques PARE bUrE ER EA MU E LEER ERE KR EA ERAER NERA FER iranin somes 136 8 2 1 Setting Up a Private Powerline Network ceeeeseceeseeeeet iere then nnne 136 8 2 2 Setting Up Multiple Powerline Networks sess 137 Bo Load Local SERIE dusisibesmiitsdben quete de epa Ie FEES ME Dae Dei ui ERR TUE EQ NAR Eun d INMERuld 138 6 4 COnnguring Remote SONGS e 139 So PORT TIE NetWork cll MENU m 140 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 2 c sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseee eee seeseeeseeeseaeeneeseeesneeeeneneeeeeneees 143 91 NAT OVSG A
55. 60 Foue 27 RAN WSIS cer 60 Figure 22 Auto Detection Mo DSL CONMQCHON 5iuececicscceice ia ecdo sut ttti evt er br dra tL tea bh iip 61 Figure 23 Auto Detection Failed me 61 Figure 24 PS ben PPPOE saric eiaa 62 Figure 25 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters eese nennen nnne 62 Figure 26 ntemet Connection with PPPOE iuuat cerros cnt sob DEI RP CHI anri Ri nda d RR doin 63 Figure 27 Internet Connection with REC 14 B3 1osssscciis icit srovnani eati Four AS edv eec Lire rr ede 64 Figure 28 Insmelt Connection with ENET ENCAP sedes ete orti eed oie i RR S 65 Figur 29 Imemet Connecton WC PPPOA uas cobet ei coo En ec telae ri bobo lnc bebo estt due o bR REI P bu e eis US 66 Figure 30 Connector Test Faded e 66 Fi ure 31 Connection Test PN a Aem TE 67 Figure 32 Conneccion Tosi SUCKS SSIUN E 67 Figure 33 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard T dli dos coco ti D dpt LANEK a aS 68 Figure 34 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 Louisa rcr lodi e E ERE REA d Ln AR ERA i nd 69 Figure 35 Manually assigni a WPA c e 70 Figure 26 Manually assign a WER Key auicc perci etia adi nei A WR RCE HE WO HER PRI E gr AES ERAS 71 Figure ar Wroless LAN SORIB S audet RPHEDN EM EUNDI EE PEUT EATEFHIU N 71 Figure 38 Internet Access and Wireless Wizard Setup Complete ssssssssssssssssss 72 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 List of Figures Foue 9 onen a pra
56. 64 alphanumeric characters in length spaces are not allowed Device Access Key Device Access Key DAK is the password used to verify that you are authorized to perform changes on a device You can find the DAK printed on a sticker on the bottom of a HomePlug enabled device You do not have to enter the DAK of your P 660HWP Dx to access the network but it is recommended that you change the DAK for added security Mask Network Password and Device Access Key Select this option to mask the network password and DAK as you enter it Local Station MAC Address This is the unique identifying address of the device you are using to configure the network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Powerline LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to apply your changes The new network password and DAK is applied to the selected P 660HWP Dx Note You must enter the correct Device Access Key DAK for the selected powerline adapter before you can make changes to it Cancel Click this button to cancel any changes you have made 8 4 Configuring Remote Settings Use this screen to access the other powerline adapters on your network You can configure these adapters and add or remove them from your network Click Network gt Powerline gt Remote Settings to access and set up the adapters on your powerline network Figure 82 Network gt Powerline gt Remote Setting Remote Setting
57. Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 7 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the P 660HWP Dx cannot connect to the Internet An example is shown in the figure below Figure 50 Traffic Redirect Example Internet WAN 2 Backup Gateway The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the P 660HWP Dx itself as the gateway for each LAN network Put the protected LAN in one subnet Subnet 1 in the following figure and the backup gateway in another subnet Subnet 2 Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN Subnet 1 to the backup gateway Subnet 2 Figure 51 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup Subnet 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 LAN mci Subnet 2 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 2 D L 4 4 A A A M 5 8 Configuring WAN Backup To change your P 660HWP Dx s WAN backup settings click Network gt WAN gt WAN Backu
58. Coniiguralon Restores ENOI oa siseieteteese se epo ct lal an bead esser Da eet buie aec ku aedee RP deitas 293 Figure 173 Restant DUFGO auisctesaesessenssapkecebbtaP s tees aE S EpL APA Sep pL VERIS SEMI D MPd SEE EE APAS OR EL APEREGVA adde EE toda 293 Figure 174 Diagnostic General MT 295 ESI NERA GIGS CAN Zee 296 Figure 179 Wal mouning EXSIBIe sisse secte r een sand i tiii erties Prem d n eter Peet RU Tee at 310 Figure 177 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw esee esee ener enn tnanna nr hth annua anon aa naa usa rn d Rua ug 310 Figure 178 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network esssssssseeeenee 311 Fae TOBEE SV 312 Figure 190 lai WLAN Meere 313 Figure 191 qp erp qu 314 Figure 182 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example sss 321 Figur 1893 WPA PSK Atthonticalioii Mem 322 Figure 184 Configuration Text File Format Column Descriptions esseesese 325 Figure 185 Invalid Parameter Entered Command Line Example sssseeees 326 Figure 186 Valid Parameter Entered Command Line Example 4 nist neret sinisini 326 Figure 187 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example rte timen rnnt ehe deat nne 327 Figure 188 Intemal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example isssereisae et tad ana ope yate ERE Eo yEx REMyTE eX ax EE ieaiaia 327 Figure 189 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration L2 rar rrne rrr rennen ta aueh that ua th
59. Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The P 660HWP Dx icon is not an exact representation of your device P 660HWP Dx Computer Notebook computer Ld Saaz bm m1 Server Firewall NN os N SSS 5 uj a ee Voie IM Veer Ss gt Telephone Switch Router Nu I P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings D gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning e e e Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information e Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports e Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling e Use ONLY an appropriate pow
60. Dx always assign the selected entry ies s IP address es to the corresponding MAC address es and host name s You can select up to 32 entries in this table Modify Click the modify icon to have the IP address field editable and change it Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table 6 6 LAN IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The P 660HWP Dx supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the P 660HWP Dx itself as the gateway for each LAN network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup When you use IP alias you can also configure firewall rules to control access between the LAN s logical networks subnets LS Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap The following figure shows a LAN divided into subnets A B and C Figure 59 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Ethemet C B 192168 2 1 192 168 2 24 Interface pu C 192168 3 1 192 168 3 24 To change your P 660HWP Dx s IP alias settings click Network gt LAN gt IP Alias The screen appears as shown Figure 60 LAN IP Alias IP Alias 1 IP Alias 1
61. IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 53 LAN and WAN IP Addresses The interface to f the LAN is Ethernet i d N WAN N F Internet EMEN Theinterfaceto the Internetora E remote node is MemUEUH TEM d the DSL port P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 1 2 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the P 660HWP Dx as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the P 660HWP Dx provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 6 1 2 1 IP Pool Setup The P 660HWP Dx is pre configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients DHCP Pool See the product specifications in the appendices Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers 6 1 3 DNS Server Address DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it The DNS server addresses that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet
62. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a Session Per single client can establish this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being User used In this case no additional NAT sessions can be established and users may not be able to access the Internet Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session Use this field to limit the number of NAT firewall sessions each client computer can establish through the P 660HWP Dx If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications you can lower this number to ensure no single client is using all of the available NAT sessions Enable SIP Select this to make sure SIP VoIP works correctly with port forwarding and port ALG triggering rules Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 9 5 Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world You may ente
63. Lern g EIE REA E bU E tii gat NANEN Li pe MELLE E UE LER Ea 105 z ln fabuPI 0 106 Figura So LANCOM LE aaa elt aaa shidavean DR bd itc a Lc na coda E i Maca a d Re dt 108 Figure 59 Physical Network amp Partitioned Logical Networks sccccceesseceeeeeessneeeceeensneeeceeenneneees 109 Figure GU LAN IP ANGS M 109 Figure 61 Example of a Wireless Network ias ees nacen tir n head Kex l Id ak ba Ek ERR ER n Ko FRE Kad 111 Figure 62 Wireless LAN General qe e 116 Figure G2 Wireless No SODUITBE occisis iexDanrti n 117 Figure 64 Wireless Static WEP Encryption Leu e i eod ah Leon Rb n RP RR A ERN PAR onthe MALE Hx a d 118 Figure 65 Wireless WPA PSKIWIPAZ POK 2 irre ttti bre tuni sacr rens doe probes sat Ere enin AED pic e ER PHI Uar S 119 Fiowe Ge Wireless WPANIPAZ 9 120 Ee I r ON TOO mt 122 Foure ce gEgae ee CR 124 Figure 69 Example Wireless Client OTIST Screen eese essen ennt a nnne th anna nita anna nun 125 si Eit snl A EU o o IULII 125 gs FuERIIMXEDIIDC C80 e suaeiaeniaabis 125 Figure 72 OTIST d progress Client uucercescecete enceinte pacem n Ok ri ta a tent Ced AE E pd d 126 Figure T3 No AP with O IST FOUNO M 126 Figure P4 OTE T aaa S tna do pc ta d gabe dtt 126 Foue To MAC Auges FIBE saosa enc nc cena as put boca Pi tete ven
64. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features Table 142 Wireless Security Relational Matrix METHOD KEY ENCRYPTIO ENTER IEEE 802 1X MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open None No Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Yes Disable WPA TKIP AES No Enable WPA PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable WPA2 TKIP AES No Enable WPA2 PSK TKIP AES Yes Disable Antenna Overview An antenna couples RF signals onto air A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna which propagates the signal through the air The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2 4GHz IEEE 802 11b or SGHz IEEE 802 11a is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna s coverage area Antenna Gain Antenna gain measured in dB decibel is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width Higher antenna gain improves the range of the
65. Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx even when the P 660HWP Dx is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 ReAuthentication Timer In Seconds Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless client authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout In Seconds The P 660HWP Dx automatically disconnects a wireless client from the wired network after a period of inactivity The wireless client needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed The default time interval is 3600 seconds or 1 hour Group Key Update Timer In Seconds The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA 2 key management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA 2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Authentication Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentic
66. OTIST enabled AP you must still click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen or hold in the RESET button for one to five seconds for the AP to transfer settings 4 Ifyou change the SSID or the keys on the AP after using OTIST you need to run OTIST again or enter them manually in the wireless client s 5 Ifyou configure OTIST to generate a WPA PSK key this key changes each time you run OTIST Therefore if a new wireless client Joins your wireless network you need to run OTIST on the AP and ALL wireless clients again P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 6 MAC Filter The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the P 660HWP Dx to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices Allow or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the P 660HWP Dx Deny Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen To change your P 660HWP Dx s MAC filter settings click Network gt Wireless LAN gt MAC Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 75 MAC Address Filter MAC Filter MAC Filter Active MAC Filter Filter Action Allow C Deny 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 00 00 00 00 00 00 6 00 00 00 00 00 00 7 00 00 00 00
67. P 660HWP Dx the policies for managing the P 660HWP Dx through the LAN interface and policies for LAN to LAN the policies that control routing between two subnets on the LAN Similarly WAN to WAN Router polices apply in the same way to the WAN port P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 11 4 1 LAN to WAN Rules The default rule for LAN to WAN traffic is that all users on the LAN are allowed non restricted access to the WAN When you configure a LAN to WAN rule you in essence want to limit some or all users from accessing certain services on the WAN WAN to LAN Rules The default rule for WAN to LAN traffic blocks all incoming connections WAN to LAN If you wish to allow certain WAN users to have access to your LAN you will need to create custom rules to allow it 11 4 2 Alerts Alerts are reports on events such as attacks that you may want to know about right away You can choose to generate an alert when a rule is matched in the Edit Rule screen see Figure 99 on page 54 When an event generates an alert a message can be immediately sent to an e mail account that you specify in the Log Settings screen Refer to the chapter on logs for details 11 5 General Firewall Policy Click Security gt Firewall to display the following screen Activate the firewall by selecting the Active Firewall check box as seen in the following screen Refer to Section 10 1 on page 35 for more information Figure 97 F
68. PKCS 7 File Path Browse Back Apply Cancel LJ The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Back Click Back to go the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 560HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen 13 12 Trusted Remote Hosts Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen This screen displays a list of the certificates of peers that you trust but which are not signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen You do not need to add any certificate that is signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen since the P 660HWP Dx automatically accepts any valid certificate signed by a trusted certification authority as being trustworthy Figure 121 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts Trusted Remote Hosts Trusted Remote Hosts PKI Storage Space in Use 5 Trusted Remote Host Certificates Issuer My Default Self signed Certificate CN P 660HWP D1 001349000001 varao modiy Import Refresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapt
69. PVA INPUT ci command for annex a wan adsl opencmd FIN FN PVA INPUT 990000001 ADSL OPMD lt O glite 1 t1 413 3 12 gdmt 3 multim ode gt ci command for annex B wan adsl opencmd FIN FN PVA INPUT 990000001 ADSL OPMD lt 0 etsi 1 normal 3 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 189 WIndows 95 98 Me Network C
70. RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Note Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen Peer TCP state out of order sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order Note The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state Firewall session time out sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out The default timeout values are as follows ICMP idle timeout 3 minutes UDP idle timeout 3 minutes TCP connection three way handshaking timeout 270 seconds TCP FIN wait timeout 2 MSL Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header TCP idle established timeout s 150 minutes TCP reset timeout 10 seconds Exceed MAX incomplete sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections TCP and UDP exceeded the user configured threshold Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall Note When the number of incomplete connections TCP UDP gt Maximum Incomplete High the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS firewall dynamic sessions until incomplete connections Maximum Incomplete Low Access block sent TCP RST The router send
71. Rate Maximum Burst Size None ha IGMP v2 i CBR X fo cell sec D cell sec o cell seo Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 More Connections Advanced Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The P 660HWP Dx supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR nRT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time or VBR RT Variable Bit Rate Real Time for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is O cells sec Maximum
72. Sara tates etm bete Dat a ile atk Le a ae al als a 107 Table 29 LAN Cle LIST saana E EERRRRRER ERAN SEN ERE ERREUR Y ELO IR REEF an 108 TOEO LAN IP AIRG m a 110 Table 31 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication 114 Table oz Wireless LANE Ganeral iuixssntictivisiimet diee ER Nen Pe ar Pr qeu P Naame iutdeniu 116 TADI 39 WYONG MO SODUEIDE circo ord Do REDIMERE da S tc p e GER CAPE p RU Rc Dt 117 Table 34 Wireless Static WEP Encryption iussus ized srt ten bete Lt ha aUe ba n opa oda dU niaaa aha 118 Table 35 Wireless VIPA POSRANPAZ PS iipsosctoiriubiestire uid ee prr deua bbs inti Reer IUE rSn A EnA ai Eai a 119 Table 38 Wireless VI PAPN PAZ Lassssszetestbrest ense PR HI eI HII e OL PES HH EFE EH TER PEE ERR Eget 121 Tabe 37 1r Bs HI co NECS UETT 122 TOEO NOT t er 124 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 List of Tables Table 239 MAC Address FUE osse Ge tm er sent nez ER kot hag id bee res s RE ect dta Con ed etes us aot 127 Te quU VET aes IEEE dasri UI Qa Rod AS ERA AUEIF CEN P9 S QU IUE POUR ERE EPEUUE ELE KL ba FER FAC Pe CEN Ad dug tud 128 Table 41 Commonly Used SOIVIGOS 2 5 5 itr ereeddecieui ditor taaracduevansscadurcanmnenduyecesteduatseuntanduvanadaduperanas 129 Ur cV dE qe c r ET 131 Table 43 Applicaton Priority Configuration p annem teeenaineentenan teats 132 Table 44 Network gt Powerline gt Local Setting 1 eese ensien eisene a 138 Table 45 Network gt Powerline gt Remote Setting
73. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration 17 6 2 SNMP Traps The P 660HWP Dx will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs Table 101 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION 0 coldStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting power on 1 warmstart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting software reboot 6 whyReboot defined in ZYXEL A trap is sent with the reason of restart before MIB rebooting when the system is going to restart warm start 6a For intentional reboot A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files Cl command sys reboot etc 6b For fatal error A trap is sent with the message of the fatal code if the system reboots because of fatal errors 17 6 3 Configuring SNMP To change your P 660HWP Dx s SNMP settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt SNMP The screen appears as shown Figure 141 Remote Management SNMP SNMP SNMP Port 161 Access Status Disable 7 Secured Client IP all Selected o 1 0 0 SNMP Configuration Get Community public Set Community public TrapCommunity public TrapDestination 0 0 0 0 q Note You may also need to create a Firewallrule Canc
74. VPI VCI This is the VPI and VCI values used for this connection Encapsulation This is the method of encapsulation used for this connection Modify The first ISP connection is read only in this screen Use the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to edit it Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the connection Click the delete icon to remove an existing connection You cannot remove the first connection Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 5 6 1 More Connections Edit Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to configure a connection P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 48 More Connections Edit General M Active Name Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Multiplexing VPI VCI IP Address C Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Connection C Nailed Up Connection Connect on Demand Max Idle timeout NAT C None Sus Only Edit Apply ChangeMe Routing PPPoA 7 P sl P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 sec Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen computers to share an Internet account If you select Bridge the P 660HWP Dx will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node other
75. WAN to WAN P ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN 660HWP Dx or the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 127 ICMP Notes TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 0 Echo Reply Echo reply message Destination Unreachable Net unreachable Host unreachable Protocol unreachable Port unreachable Bl ws ny ej o A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment DF Source route failed Source Quench A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network Redirect Redirect datagrams for the Network Redirect datagrams for the Host Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network WI NI RIO Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host Echo Echo message 11 Time Exceeded Time to live exceeded in transit Fragment reassembly time exceeded Parameter Problem Pointer indicates the error Timestamp Timestamp request message Timestamp Reply Timestamp reply message Information Request Information request message Information Reply Information reply message P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 128 Syslog Logs LOG MES
76. When the number of existing half open sessions rises above a threshold max incomplete high the P 660HWP Dx starts deleting half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests The P 660HWP Dx continues to delete half open requests as necessary until the number of existing half open sessions drops below another threshold max incomplete low When the rate of new connection attempts rises above a threshold one minute high the P 660HWP Dx starts deleting half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests The P 660HWP Dx continues to delete half open sessions as necessary until the rate of new connection attempts drops below another threshold one minute low The rate is the number of new attempts detected in the last one minute sample period 11 10 2 1 TCP Maximum Incomplete and Blocking Time An unusually high number of half open sessions with the same destination host address could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is being launched against the host Whenever the number of half open sessions with the same destination host address rises above a threshold TCP Maximum Incomplete the P 660HWP Dx starts deleting half open sessions according to one of the following methods Ifthe Blocking Time timeout is 0 the default then the P 660HWP Dx deletes the oldest existing half open session for the host for every new connection request to the host This ensures that the number of half open sessions
77. and networks with a connection to the Internet Their goal is not to steal information but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources The P 660HWP Dx is pre configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks 10 4 1 Basics Computers share information over the Internet using a common language called TCP IP TCP IP in turn is a set of application protocols that perform specific functions An extension number called the TCP port or UDP port identifies these protocols such as HTTP Web FTP File Transfer Protocol POP3 E mail etc For example Web traffic by default uses TCP port 80 When computers communicate on the Internet they are using the client server model where the server listens on a specific TCP UDP port for information requests from remote client computers on the network For example a Web server typically listens on port 80 Please note that while a computer may be intended for use over a single port such as Web on port 80 other ports are also active If the person configuring or managing the computer is not careful a hacker could attack it over an unprotected port Some of the most common IP ports are Table 55 Common IP Ports 21 FTP 53 DNS 23 Telnet 80 HTTP 25 SMTP 110 POP3 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 10 4 2 Types of DoS Attacks There are four types of DoS attacks 1 Those that exploit b
78. apply to a certification authority for a certificate You must have the certification authority s certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen When you select this option you must select the certification authority s enrollment protocol and the certification authority s certificate from the drop down list boxes and enter the certification authority s server address You also need to fill in the Reference Number and Key if the certification authority requires them P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 73 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enrollment Protocol Select the certification authority s enrollment protocol from the drop down list box Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol SCEP is a TCP based enrollment protocol that was developed by VeriSign and Cisco Certificate Management Protocol CMP is a TCP based enrollment protocol that was developed by the Public Key Infrastructure X 509 working group of the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF and is specified in RFC 2510 CA Server Address Enter the IP address or URL of the certification authority server CA Certificate Select the certification authority s certificate from the CA Certificate drop down list box You must have the certification authority s certificate already imported in the Trusted CAs screen Click Trusted CAs to go to the Trusted CAs screen
79. authentication is done using a RADIUS server the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority Idle Timeout In The P 660HWP Dx automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wireless Seconds network after a period of inactivity The wireless station needs to send the username and password again before it can use the wireless network again Some wireless clients may prompt users for a username and password other clients may use saved login credentials In either case there is usually a short delay while the wireless client logs in to the wireless network again This value is usually smaller when the wireless network is keeping track of how much time each wireless station is connected to the wireless network for example using an authentication server If the wireless network is not keeping track of this information you can usually set this value higher to reduce the number of delays caused by logging in again P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 35 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Key The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP if using WPA PSK Update Timer In WPA2 PSK key management or RADIUS server if using WPA 2 key Seconds management sends a new group key out to all clients The re keying process is the WPA 2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basi
80. budgets to different bandwidth rules The P 660HWP Dx applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface The P 660HWP Dx does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the P 660HWP Dx and be managed by bandwidth management The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to any interface must be less than or equal to the speed allocated to that interface in the Bandwidth Management gt Summary screen 15 2 Application based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications like VoIP Web FTP E mail and Video for example 15 3 Subnet based Bandwidth Management You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets The following figure shows LAN subnets You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management Figure 129 Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example LAN A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 ews ze gt e Tn O 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 WAN m Internet gt 15 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application The following exampl
81. categories that you select in the Log Settings screen display in the drop down list box Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e mail address specified in the Log Settings page make sure that you have first filled in the E mail Log Settings fields in Log Settings Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs This field indicates the log number Time This field displays the time the log was recorded Message This field states the reason for the log Source This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet Notes This field displays additional information about the log entry 20 3 Configuring Log Settings Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the P 660HWP Dx is to send logs the schedule for when the P 660HWP Dx is to send the logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the P 660HWP Dx is to record See Section 20 1 on page 35 for more information To change your P 660HWP Dx s log settings click Maintenance gt Logs gt Log Settings The screen appears as shown Alerts are e mailed as soon as they happen Logs may be e mailed as so
82. check 1 Match next 2 forward 3 drop gt Table 151 Menu 23 System Menus Menu 23 1 System Password Setup FI FN PVA INPUT 230000000 System Password 1234 Menu 23 2 System security radius server FI FN PVA INPUT 230200001 Authentication Server Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt LUE 230200002 Authentication Server Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 4 230200003 Authentication Server IP Address 192 168 1 32 230200004 Authentication Server Port 1822 230200005 Authentication Server Shared Secret 111111111111 111 111111111111 1111 230200006 Accounting Server Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt SA 230200007 Accounting Server Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 230200008 Accounting Server IP Address 192 168 1 44 230200009 Accounting Server Port 1823 230200010 Accounting Server Shared Secret 1234 Menu 23 4 System security IEEE802 1x FI FN PVA INPUT 230400001 Wireless Port Control lt 0 Authentication 2 Required 1 No Access Allowed 2 No Authentication Required gt P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 47 Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 151 Menu 23 System Menus continued 230400002 ReAuthentication Timer in second 555 230400003 Idle Timeout in second 999 230400004 Authentication Databases lt 0 Local User 1 Database Only 1 RADIUS Only 2 Local RADIUS 3 RADI
83. client identity is protected For client authentication EAP TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP CHAP MS CHAP and MS CHAP v2 PEAP Protected EAP LEAP Like EAP TTLS server side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients thus hiding client identity However PEAP only supports EAP methods such as EAP MD5 EAP MSCHAPv2 and EAP GTC EAP Generic Token Card for client authentication EAP GTC is implemented only by Cisco LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802 1x P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server This key expires when the wireless connection times out disconnects or reauthentication times out A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed If this feature is enabled it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen You may still configure and store keys here but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled EAP MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security certificate based authentications EAP TLS EAP TTLS and PEAP use dynamic keys for data encryption They are often deployed in corporate environments but f
84. displays a summary list of directory servers that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates that have been saved into the P 660HWP Dx If you decide to have the P 660HWP Dx check incoming certificates against the issuing certification authority s list of revoked certificates the P 660HWP Dx first checks the server s listed in the CRL Distribution Points field of the incoming certificate If the certificate does not list a server or the listed server is not available the P 660HWP Dx checks the servers listed here Figure 124 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers Directory Servers Directory Servers PKI Storage Space in Use 6 o NE 100 Directory Services r a a The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage This bar displays the percentage of the P 560HWP Dx s PKI storage space that is Space in Use currently in use When the storage space is almost full you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates The index number of the directory server The servers are listed in alphabetical order Name This field displays the name used to identify this directory server Address This field displays the IP address or domain name of the directory server Port This field displays the port number that the directory server
85. e Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet A This zone contains all Web sites you Gites haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional er Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level D Default Level OK Cancel Apply Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting oar WO ND Click OK to close the window Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 219 Security Settings Java Scripting Security Settings Settings Scripting amp Active scripting a Be Ble 3 Allow paste operations via script Disable 9 Enable Prompt amp Scripting of Java applets Q Disable AQ Enable 2 Q Prompl Lienas AuhSenkie skinn b custom settings Reset to Medium Reset ced Java Permissions Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Microsoft VM Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected Click OK to close the window cO
86. from a computer subnet on the LAN to either another computer subnet on the LAN interface of the P 660HWP Dx or the P 660HWP Dx itself Default Action Use the drop down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet for a TCP packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message for a UDP packet to the sender Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets Log Select the check box to create a log when the above action is taken for packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of your customized rules Expand Click this button to display more information Basic Click this button to display less information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 6 Firewall Rules Summary BS The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn Refer to Section 10 1 on page 35 for more information Click Security gt Firewall gt Rules to bring up the following screen This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules Note the order in which th
87. gt 40000028 Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 40000029 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 40000030 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 146 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continued 40000031 RIP Direction lt 0 None 0 1 Both 2 In Only 3 Out Only 400000322 RIP Version O Rip 1 0 1 Rip 2B 2 Rip 2M gt 40000033 Nailed up Connection lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt Table 147 Menu 12 Menu 12 1 1 IP Static Route Setup FI F PVA INPUT 20101001 IP Static Route set 1 Name Str 120101002 IP Static Route set 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 20101003 IP Static Route set 1 Destination 0 0 0 0 IP address 20101004 IP Static Route set 1 Destination 0 IP subnetmask 20101005 IP Static Route set 1 Gateway 0 0 0 0 20101006 IP Static Route set 1 Metric 0 20101007 IP Static Route set 1 Private lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Menu 12 1 2 IP Static Route Setup FIN F PVA INPUT 120108001 IP Static Route set 8 Name lt Str gt 120108002 IP Static Route set 8 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 120108003 IP Static Route set 8 Destination 0 0 0 0 IP address 120108004 IP Static Route set 8 Destination 0 IP subnetmask 120108005 IP Static Route set 8 Gat
88. ii ZeXS EH au o Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device has been designed for the WLAN 2 4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix K Legal Information ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at
89. illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP Alias behind the P 660HWP Dx can communicate with three distinct WAN networks More examples follow at the end of this chapter P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 85 NAT Application With IP Alias A LAN1 192 168 1 X dt B 492 168 14 E m IP4 GA 1 LA N2 192 168 2 X Colada duin Internet IP 2 IGA 2 EEEEB d W 192 1682 1 IP3 IGA 3 9 1 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are One to One In One to One mode the P 660HWP Dx maps one local IP address to one global IP address Many to One In Many to One mode the P 660HWP Dx maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA for instance PAT port address translation ZyXEU s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported the SUA Only option in today s routers Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the P 660HWP Dx maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload In Many to Many No Overload mode the P 660HWP Dx maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Port numbers do NOT change fo
90. into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the broadcast address on the subnet Table 161 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER Vi E IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 162 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 163 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER PARU EM IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 1
91. is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix K Legal Information If this device does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the device off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measu
92. logged in or you want to change to a new password again then click Maintenance gt System to display the screen shown next See Table 107 on page 266 for detailed field descriptions Figure 19 System General System Setup System Name Domain Name Password User Password New Password Retype to confirm Admin Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm A Caution Administrator Inactivity Timer eo minutes 0 means no timeout m m Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Apply Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART I Wizards Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access 59 Bandwidth Management Wizard 73 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens for Internet Wireless access in the web configurator 3 1 Introduction Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet Wireless access with the information given to you by your ISP LES See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields 3 2 Internet Wireless Access Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the admin password to access the web configurator select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply Otherwise click the wizard icon in the top
93. lt gt Use of undocumented commands or misconfiguration can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable Accessing the CLI Use the following steps to telnet into your P 660HWP Dx 1 Connect your computer to the ETHERNET port on the P 660HWP Dx 2 Make sure your computer IP address and the P 660HWP Dx IP address are on the same subnet In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default P 660HWP Dx IP address and click OK 3 A login screen displays Enter the default admin password 1234 Command Syntax The command keywords are in courier new font Enter the command keywords exactly as shown do not abbreviate The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets The symbol means or For example sys filter netbios config type onJoff means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off Command Usage A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Always type the full command Type exit to log out of the CLI when finished P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix F Command Interpreter Log Commands This section provides some general examples of how to use the log commands The items that display with your device may vary but the basic function should be the same Go to the com
94. mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when s he signs up If your ISP gives you the DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in DHCP Setup otherwise leave them blank Some ISP s choose to pass the DNS servers using the DNS server extensions of PPP IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation The P 660HWP Dx supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature If the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen are not specified for instance left as 0 0 0 0 the P 660HWP Dx tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server When a computer sends a DNS query to the P 660HWP Dx the P 660HWP Dx forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen This way the P 660HWP Dx can pass the DNS servers to the computers and the computers can query the DNS server directly wit
95. may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 Telnet Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems Telnet uses TCP port 23 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION NetMeeting H 323 A multimedia communications product from Microsoft that enables groups to teleconference and videoconference over the Internet NetMeeting supports VoIP text chat sessions a whiteboard file transfers and application sharing NetMeeting uses H 323 H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service H 323 is transported primarily over TCP using the default port number 1720 VoIP SIP Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP Session Initiated Protocol SIP is an internationally recognize
96. number of downstream bits Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP Microsoft s implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol MBM v2 Media Bandwidth Management v2 RFC 2383 ST2 over ATM Protocol Specification UNI 3 1 Version TR 069 TR 069 DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management 1 363 5 Compliant AAL5 SAR Segmentation And Re assembly Wall mounting Instructions Complete the following steps to hang your P 660HWP Dx on a wall BS See the Hardware Specifications table for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them 1 Select a high position on a sturdy wall that is free of obstructions 2 Drill two holes for the screws 3 Becareful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 4 Do not insert the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 5 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the P 660HWP Dx with the connection cables 6 Align the holes on the back of the P 660HWP Dx with the screws on the wall Hang the P 660HWP Dx on the screws P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Figure 176 Wall mounting Example TA iim Ill Hi Figure 177 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug us
97. numbers A blank destination IP address means any destination IP address Source Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation A blank source IP address means any source IP address Source Subnet Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Netmask Source Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting A blank source port means any source port number Source Port Enter the port number of the source See Table 95 on page 45 for some common services and port numbers Protocol Select the protocol TCP or UDP or select User defined and enter the protocol service type number 0 means any protocol number TOS Type of TOS defines the DS Differentiated Service field in the IP header Service Enter the new TOS value of the outgoing packet between 0 and 255 0 is the lowest priority TOS Mask The TOS mask is used to compare the specified or entire bits in the TOS IP header with the value specified in this rule Enter the TOS Mask value between 0 lowest priority and 255 Back Click Back to go to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Table 95 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS
98. of directory server access protocol P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART V Advanced Static Route 219 Bandwidth Management 223 Dynamic DNS Setup 235 Remote Management Configuration 239 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 251 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your P 660HWP Dx 14 1 Static Route Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the P 660HWP Dx has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the P 660HWP Dx knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the P 660HWP Dx is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn t know that there is a route through the same remote node Router 1 via gateway Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the P 660HWP Dx about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 126 Example of Static Routing Topology N1 N2 N3 14 2 Configuring Static Route Click Advanced gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 14 Static Route Figure 127 Static Route Static Route Static Route Rules A a TN CT T1 oan Donk ON M A m j Ro aana WN 02 test 10 10 1 2 192 168 1 3 255 0 0 0 T RAARRAAARAAR Eb Eb E E E E B E Eb E Bb E E E E BD Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Static Ro
99. only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field 5 1 5 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP Address Assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above 5 1 5 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP However for a dynamic IP the P 660HWP Dx acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A as the DHCP server assigns them to the P 660HWP Dx 5 1 6 Nailed Up Connection PPP A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The P 660HWP Dx does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the P 660HWP Dx will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Do not specify a nailed up connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 5 1 7 NAT NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of
100. ossec a R 378 Figure 210 Security Settings Java Cry usi eadem i edad i ade EN 379 Figure 220 Security Settings Jav usos erp pau ta Esau ra OA dc Sanaa baa Sa eSEE ED in E i 379 Figure 221 Java CSUN P 380 Be Nig eee 1a cco Bao 11 6 383 Figure 223 Trongis Route Problem ep m 384 Fouro 224 IP AIS ncnian aE a 384 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables TIS TADLES ere ne Pee ree MEE Pree rene ee eer Pear ore ener ery ner area serene creer 36 Taco c FON Panel LEES spies ite Ed ona prc rae pe om nn a UE pid Tene reat Vere mere A 38 Table 3 Web Configurator Screens SUMMEAY ccsissccccisrsccescsss snceceess censecoss tutte caet nena EEO E 47 THEA SUs SaO MT HR 50 Palle gt Sree lua a LT 52 Table 6 Status WLAN cu qe 52 Table 7 tate Packet Statisties e E T RT 54 Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters cccecceececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeaeceeeeeeeetenseees 63 Table 9 Internet Connection wilh PPPOE 25215 5 5 erras Ire ELI FEH ht SH o be Y EMITIR EPI TSE Exe ERE E vd dd S Said 23 64 Table 10 Intemet Connection with RFC TABS ssh lernen E eux EE neniani ERR FEN D USE andadi eaaa E Ere Us 64 Table 11 Intemet Connection with ENET ENGAP dccsedeck ker eU sac sadies Lot RE II ESSI p RINPUEPEu ctn bonni iaa
101. ports TCP 20 21 are allowed from the Internet to the LAN Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers 5 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules 6 Once these questions have been answered adding rules is simply a matter of plugging the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens 11 3 3 Key Fields For Configuring Rules 11 3 3 1 Action Should the action be to Drop Reject or Permit ex Drop means the firewall silently discards the packet Reject means the firewall discards packets and sends an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender 11 3 3 2 Service Select the service from the Service scrolling list box If the service is not listed it is necessary to first define it See Section Table 64 on page 61 for more information on predefined services 11 3 3 3 Source Address What is the connection s source address is it on the LAN or WAN Is it a single IP a range of IPs or a subnet 11 3 3 4 Destination Address What is the connection s destination address is it on the LAN or WAN Is it a single IP a range of IPs or a subnet 11 4 Connection Direction This section describes examples for firewall rules for connections going from LAN to WAN and from WAN to LAN LAN to LAN Router and WAN to WAN Router rules apply to packets coming in on the associated interface LAN or WAN respectively LAN to LAN Router means policies for LAN to
102. printable form e Binary PKCS 7 This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data including digital signatures that may be encrypted The P 660HWP Dx currently allows the importation of a PKS 7 file that contains a single certificate e PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 This Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary PKCS 7 certificate into a printable form LES Be careful to not convert a binary file to text during the transfer process It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default Figure 117 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Import Certificates MY Certificates Import Please specify the location of the certificate file to be imported The certificate file must be in one of the following formats Binary X 509 PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 For my certificate importation to be successful a certification request corresponding to the imported certificate must already exist on Prestige After the importation the certification request will automatically be deleted File Path Browse Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it B
103. remote host certificates Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen 13 7 My Certificates gt Create Click Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create to open the My Certificate Create screen Use this screen to have the P 660HWP Dx create a self signed certificate enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request Figure 116 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create Certificates My Certificates Create Certificate Name Subject Information Common Name Host IP Address C Host Domain Name 7 C E Mail Organizational Unit Organization Country i SY Key Length 1024 jbits Enrollment Options Create a self signed certificate C Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online Enrollment Protocol Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol SCEP CA Server Address CA Certificate tsee Trusted CAs Request Authentication Key Apply Cancel 42 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name Type up to 31 ASCII characters not including spaces to identify this
104. right corner of the web configurator to display the wizard main screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 20 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode 2 Click INTERNET WIRELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access Figure 21 Wizard Welcome Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup 3 The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using If the wizard detects your connection type and your ISP uses PPPoE or PPPoA go to Section 3 2 1 on page 37 The screen varies depending on the connection type you use If the wizard does not detect a connection type and the following screen appears see Figure 22 on page 37 check your hardware connections and click Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard to have the P 660HWP Dx detect your connection again 36 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 22 Auto Detection No DSL Connection USSTEP P STEP2 f Internet Configuration ter has E E The light on the ill blink Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard Continue to Wireless Setup wizard Yes If the wizard still cannot detect a connection type and the following screen appears see Figure 23 on page 37 click Next and refer to Section 3 2 2 on page 38 on how to configure the P 660HWP Dx for Internet access manually Figure 23 Aut
105. rs bobo 83 BT NAT anexo eta eme A rd etes 84 ird TR 84 SNO n 84 SERE NS ETUDES AENA RAAE aa 85 54 Zero Configuration Intemet ACCESE lI 86 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 2 5 memet COFINOGUON iiec cepe ttt p d 3S Ee In ESI RR RR ER Ke OE add qa LU RR OR RR AU pa di 86 5 5 1 Configuring Advanced Internet Connection Setup sssssssssssss 88 5 5 Configirinag Nore Cae toS 2 ekvntic ie exciso neninn tani dau cu bad Feb onai Ua E dU E 90 5 0 1 More Connections Edil 1 aic cep einer i Cu a a c DE o a d i aai 91 5 6 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup ssssssssssseee 94 Ug TESI ESSE ounuictsiccezerisicri serie OP aPaliccin deni cu aei cte rae cis CERA MI SERE MAIL eC qe pls LUM DRE BEL UN 95 D End WAN BACKUP 2ussisseeaitixvupattvnse inia ERR CER KC HE PY S PEG IKE AEA MGE NES eS DN ER Exo kaan 95 Chapter 6 Bol EG gm 99 SREE NOV GRICE eec 99 6 1 1 LANs WANS and the P OGUHVWP DN iiieccissskteuseeessttaseces ae npo d AE IR ER EFI re Rad 99 BLZ DOE Seti esses cas ashes qe dei era it NR MM IDEM 100 6 1 2 DNS Serer AUG 25e n cci iini cuni ivz rtl vods cosa esie bras Lev EPOR RUE M PC ead daducE On 100 6 1 4 DNS Server Address Assignment eeeeeeeee e eueeese sena aa ka anth aad ua sb aa aa 100 Auge Be See ete t 101 6 2 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask sis
106. screen Table 54 Edit Address Mapping Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Choose the port mapping type from one of the following One to One One to One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for One to one NAT mapping type Many to One Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only Many to Many Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end local IP address ILA If your rule is for all local IP addresses then enter 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to One and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA This field
107. signal for better communications For an indoor site each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2 5 For an unobstructed outdoor site each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5 Actual results may vary depending on the network environment Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna An isotropic antenna 1s a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications Omni directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane The coverage area is torus shaped like a donut which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment With a wide coverage area it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern Angles typically range from 20 degrees very directional to 120 degrees less directional Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point to point applications Positioning Antennas In general antennas should be mounted as high as pr
108. the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 106 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active the Universal Plug Select this check box to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could and Play UPnP Feature use a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the P 660HWP Dx s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make Select this check box to allow UPnP enabled applications to configuration changes automatically configure the P 560HWP Dx so that they can through UPnP communicate through the P 660HWP Dx for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Table 106 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Allow UPnP to pass through Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP enabled applications to Firewall bypass the firewall Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application packets for example MSN packets Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to r
109. the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix K Legal Information
110. to a given host will never exceed the threshold If the Blocking Time timeout is greater than 0 then the P 660HWP Dx blocks all new connection requests to the host giving the server time to handle the present connections The P 660HWP Dx continues to block all new connection requests until the Blocking Time expires e 11 10 3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds The P 660HWP Dx also sends alerts whenever TCP Maximum Incomplete is exceeded The global values specified for the threshold and timeout apply to all TCP connections Click Firewall and Threshold to bring up the next screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 108 Firewall Threshold Threshold One Minute Low One Minute High Maximum Incomplete Low Maximum Incomplete High TCP Maximum Incomplete Denial of Service Thresholds so Sessions per Minute fico Sessions per Minute so Sessions fico Sessions Ro Sessions Action taken when TCP Maximum Incomplete reached threshold Delete the Oldest Half Open Session when New Connection Request Comes C Deny New Connection Request for fio Minutes 1 255 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Firewall Threshold LABEL DESCRIPTION DEFAULT VALUES Denial of Service Thresholds One Minute Low This is the rate of new half open sessions that causes the firewall to stop deleting half
111. to make basic configuration changes Use Advanced mode if you need access eos advanced features not indudedi in Wizard mode Apply Exit P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard 2 Click BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT SETUP to configure the system for Internet access Figure 40 Wizard Welcome Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup INTERNET WIRELESS SETUP ou through the nfiguration n broken down into jf which may 3 Activate bandwidth management and select to allocate bandwidth to packets based on the service requirements Figure 41 ct the check amount of b active Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information ff General Information ox to apply bandwidth management to traffic going through the device Enter dwidth that you want to allocate The following fields describe the label in this screen Table 18 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the Active check box to have the P 660HWP Dx apply bandwidth management to traffic going out through the P G60HWP Dx s port s Select Services Setup to allocate bandwidth based on the service requirements Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 4 Use the second wizard screen to select the services that you want to apply bandwidth m
112. usage and allotments Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Remote MGMT WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use HTTPS or HTTP to manage the P 660HWP Dx Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use Telnet to manage the P 660HWP Dx FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can use FTP to access the P 660HWP Dx SNMP Use this screen to configure your P 660HWP Dx s settings for Simple Network Management Protocol management DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from which IP address es users can send DNS queries to the P 660HWP Dx ICMP Use this screen to change your anti probing settings UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION Maintenance System General This screen contains administrative and system related information and also allows you to change your password Time Setting Use this screen to change your P 660HWP Dx s time and date Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected Log Settings Use this screen to change your P 660
113. want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add Click OK when finished P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 197 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properties Advanced TCP IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es f you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 198 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP s
114. will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so old rules 5 6 and 7 become new rules 4 5 and 6 To change your P 660HWP Dx s address mapping settings click Network gt NAT gt Address Mapping to open the following screen Figure 90 Address Mapping Rules Address Mapping Address Mapping Rules Local startre tocalend 1p Global start 1p Global End 1P 1 88 Q YY AY C A UR E E E E B E B E B eo The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 53 Address Mapping Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the rule index number Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to one and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for Many to One and Server mapping types Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Address IGA This field is N A for One to one Many to One and Server mapping types Type 1 1 One to one mode maps one local IP address to one glob
115. yeti SR ER PERRA SR UE SO RR d 39 1 5 2 Telephone BICFOUIISES 1 aescmcte cn alu v eei aE E la tu epo obe p Epsgdens 39 ES PLA DU LU UAE MU IMNI 40 Chapter 2 introducing tho Web Configur altar iussiseeessnkia iik auxi aa dE n m RE EREKANRtE Ke EE XAR BERE gap dtu RE AMA Rm R da n SEE aki 43 2 1 Web Configurator CIV SIMI oen s Deseo Ec eui eio epi abba dli ENa aa Nara AEA a E pu E aU pA DA 43 2 2 Accessing The Web ConfiQuUralOr e and 43 2 AT USO A oo M e 44 2 2 2 Adma FOR SS ied pied x Ip bene eS EE FER OP Hao MM REA ENIM FN HARE QUE ERA E 44 4 9 Resetting tlie P BOUFIVVEIENC u s oiueiateceudutcank2 eerie eh bia vanes dett X ori veda te VC aa a DU E 46 2 3 1 Using the Reset BUON sione prepa Etpa dodi NAA NEA AnaS EEANN pO La a oa 46 24 Navigating ihe Web Connguralof scaceleticue sein n e EA 46 DAT NVGO FANE sessi 46 PA PAE E E E asin E A m TT 49 24 3 Status Any IP Table saisine a i 51 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Table of Contents ZA A Stans VELA Eorum HH 52 240 SAS CNN ODE as ta vianenasessaaueansasanleaceresaadseives nasa EE EUH HEX EIU KDE iridia baada 52 24 b Status Powerline SUIESIIDS auuixusepvrisen reed capes cH EVER ae NEU Fab a2 dU Fe Ep P UNDE PIRE cb IDETE 53 247 SWANS ecco eaaa A 53 24 8 Changing Login Password snsecsmscsnnioanni tennin an E e EPI EA RD MIE 55 Part IE Wizard 57 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Int
116. your powerline adapters to ensure secure data transmission on your powerline network 8 2 1 Setting Up a Private Powerline Network To prevent others compromising your network security you can create a private network Create a private network by changing the network password only on the powerline adapters you want to communicate in your network The P 660HWP Dx and powerline adapters convert the network password to a Network Membership Key NMK Only the powerline adapters with the same NMK can communicate in your network The following figure shows a scenario A where all the powerline adapters have the same NMK NMK1 and scenario B where some adapters use NMK1 and some use NMK2 Figure 79 Powerline Network Scenario NmKi onmK1 NMK1 NMK2 4 EE n r P NMKT ij iod NMK M f p I NMK1 NMK1 NMK1 NMK2 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Powerline In both cases the powerline adapters reside on the same electrical circuit In scenario A all the powerline adapters can communicate with each other In scenario B only the adapters with the same NMK can receive and unscramble communication between each other 8 2 2 Setting Up Multiple Powerline Networks Multiple powerline networks can coexist on a single powerline circuit You might want to implement multiple powerline networks in a small office environment where you have two separate Ethernet networks Connect one powerli
117. 0 WIVES o DSL Firmware Version TI AR7 07 00 04 00 eai REESE e WAN Information Lp Adres 0 0 0 IP Address 0 0 0 0 MEE nonae Stalls a ask 0 0 0 0 exl E way 0000 a E Use the E b Bos n DSL Down 0 kbps 0 kbps Ii submenus 19216811 LAN 1 Up 100M Full Duplex to configure 255 255 255 0 TUT P 660HWP d LAN 3 Down ZyXEL 6 Disabled Dx features LAN 4 WLAN Active 125M G curity Firewall Enabled Content Filter Disabled Powerline Active 0 Mbps 0 Mbps Summary AnyIP Table Bandwidth Status Packet Statistics Powerline Status P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator embedded help Click the amp icon located in the top right corner of most screens to view Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION Wizard INTERNET Use these screens for initial configuration including general WIRELESS setup ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP DNS SETUP Server MAC address assignment BANDWIDTH Use these screens to limit bandwidth usage by application or MANAGEMENT packet type SETUP Logout g Click this icon to exit the web configurator Status This screen shows the P 660HWP Dxs general device system and interface status information Use this screen to access the summary statistics tables Network WAN Internet This s
118. 0HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Content Filter Keyword LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Keyword Blocking Select this check box to enable this feature Block Websites that This box contains the list of all the keywords that you have configured the contain these keywords in P 660HWP Dx to block the URL Delete Highlight a keyword in the box and click Delete to remove it Clear All Click Clear All to remove all of the keywords from the list Keyword Type a keyword in this field You may use any character up to 127 characters Wildcards are not allowed Add Keyword Click Add Keyword after you have typed a keyword Repeat this procedure to add other keywords Up to 64 keywords are allowed When you try to access a web page containing a keyword you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 12 3 Configuring the Schedule To set the days and times for the P 660HWP Dx to perform content filtering click Security gt Content Filter gt Schedule The screen appears as shown Figure 110 Content Filter Schedule cov ae Schedule Active Everyday to Block v Edit Daily to Block Monday Vv 8 ndo min i7 h 30 min Tuesday Iv 0 h
119. 0Nv Figure 220 Security Settings Java Security Settings Settings Q Disable 9 Enable es Font download Q Disable 9 Enable a 3 Microsoft VM Java permissions Q Custom Q Low safety Reset custom settings Reset to Medium z Reset J P 660HWP Dx User s Guide From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 221 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings v Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections 9 Java ae Iv Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 for apple requis eso Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for Use Java 2 v1 4 1_07 for apple requis eso requires restart icross bers Java Vn enabled requires restart O Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing xf gt Restore Defaults P 660HWP D
120. 1e ied eed tuna Edi e Led neta dd 353 Figure 204 Red Har 9 0 KDE Ethemel Device General asa tele Ee di Sr ea eb Pr eel ni ucd ae 353 Figure 205 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS 2eaccesse sess secet geist a khad acid tas bao a deu e puetad 354 Figure 206 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate acoustic nti kid 354 Figure 207 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO ssssseesess 355 Figure 208 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO ssssseeees 355 Figure 209 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in Teso Conf uses derbi etta Fax dbi nsa Ke 355 Figure 210 Red Hat 9 0 Restart ElbermeE Cand cccssssccancrssnectasssaiuernstisannetansanmetadeaauetasstianneramcranarenaes 355 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Figures Figure 211 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties uicina e rhe E htt t eb a ihe sees 356 Figure 212 Displaying Log Categories Example 5 usse terna rtt tht nuhi ua ERA a aun 366 Figure 213 Displaying Log Parameters Example 1 2 2222 creciente btt kr tadt ek rrd ka kinni iiaa 366 Figure 14 Popat BOCE 3 21 ai m tenet oerte o dite ox cx es ales al hil det in sa id be tat 375 Figur 215 internet Options PETS quusattecnentcavisciimisiestvtibutesei tula venei atus annie ue tup ER caeci siu GE 376 Figure 216 Intemet Opions re M 377 Figure 217 Pop up Blocker Solings MT 377 Figure 219 Inisimet Options OEOUPIDE
121. 3 GEHT CR TIOS ivtnctssidensstuisiinriwiecestnatiasctaasactinberiwiedinssciiesderesiaiieiaiantl E a Ud ap ETICA I sala 195 131 rk pee a e 195 13 1 1 Advantages of Certificates i cvs cicccnastnnceacidastinaavtassnsbedeas ssanducendssnbedeeasnnnastdassanaaeuessanied 196 13 2 Solf sighad COortifiGales 1 22 desidiae crie rro b to tot dur rt etd bud dd Red Id iud dde Ead 196 Tae YORI Se COMING He Em 196 13 3 1 Checking the Fingerprint of a Certificate on Your Computer sssusse 196 jer KevsieUr enu M 197 Mca Eni P PT 198 ESCAS quU Bremer c e 199 I TE SIS EP cM mmm 202 13 8 My Certificates di pue 204 1281 Cenihiecate File FORTIS cissucrcesicinhstemanseustestqesisseiveseastesiasniiadesieubietehienieerssannetes 205 TO TSOI CAS ainen COA 206 TAIO Trusted CS uc rm I3 207 EU ue wu a 209 T3 12 Trusted Remote Hosts cusiesiepen inanis vente aai isin Meinl aden aad debi enda La 210 18 19 Tr sted Remote Hosts gt MPO iuissaser iniri repe d pet p P RE EERE 211 13 14 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details eeeeeseeceeeeece nennen tna 212 NST TUONO OTS MERE 215 13 16 Directory Server Add or Edit iicet anniina caneeduetveanndadurtsancaddur vant 215 Zu V PNG 217 Chapter 14 Sot RUAN ni a a aaa aE 219 TS ROUE aiena PH 219 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 14 2 Comiouma S
122. 5678 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Manually assign a WPA key LABEL DESCRIPTION Pre Shared Type from 8 to 63 case sensitive English keyboard characters You can set up the Key most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens You need to configure an authentication server to do this Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 3 2 Manually assign a WEP key Choose Manually assign a WEP key to setup WEP Encryption parameters P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 36 Manually assign a WEP key fa Wireless LAN Note On the last page of the Wireless Setup wizard you will have a chance write down this key and your network settings for safekeeping The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Manually assign a WEP key LABEL DESCRIPTION Key The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the P 660HWP Dx and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission Enter any 5 13 or 29 English keyboard characters or 10 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP key respectively Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit
123. 6 Security WPAZ Security Firewall Enabled Content Filter Disabled TI AR 07 00 04 00 Memory Usage _ lo DSL Down 0 kbps 0 kbps LAN 1 Down LAN 2 Up 100M Full Duplex LAN 3 Down LAN 4 Down WLAN Active 125M G Powerline Active 0 Mbps 0 Mbps Summary AnyIP Table WLAN Status Powerline Status Bandwidth Status Packet Statistics P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen Table 4 Status Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select a number of seconds or None from the drop down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen Statistics Apply Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics Device Information Host Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance gt System gt General screen It is for identification purposes Model Number This is your P 660HWP Dx s model name MAC Address This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your P 660HWP Dx ZyNOS Firmware Version This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date created ZyNOS is ZyXEL s proprietary Network Operating System design DSL Firmware This is the DSL firmware version associated with your P 660HWP Dx This is Version sometimes
124. 60HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 16 Status Bandwidth Status Monitor Jian x To LAN Interface m ee NetMeeting H 323 amal 0 kbps vec DOO I VoIP H 323 m 0 kbps 2 4 6 Status Powerline Statistics Click the Powerline Statistics hyperlink in the Status screen The following screen will appear Figure 17 Status Powerline General CCo Information Mac Address 00 13 49 d1 cb 10 TEL 1 NID eefb20c08cc113 SNID 15 Local Station Information Mac Address 00 13 49 d1 cb 10 CCo mode Auto TEI 1 MAC Firmware Version IMT6000 MAC 1 4 1444 556 20061108 FINAL B Topology In Local Network 0 0 D Refresh See Figure 46 on page 140 for information on the headings on this screen 2 4 7 Status Packet Statistics Click the Packet Statistics hyperlink in the Status screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable Not all fields are available on all models P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 18 Status Packet Statistics System Monitor peed stream Speed 1 ENET LAN Port Statistics 1 0 kbps ae a Ree Ea T BETXITDEAS N A 0 o 0 0 0 0 00 00 Te NH Ee 0 20 30 01 01 2000 00 20 36 1 06 28 9 kbps
125. 60HWP Dx that has maximize bandwidth usage enabled on an interface The following table shows each bandwidth class s bandwidth budget The classes are set up based on subnets The interface is set to 10240 kbps Each subnet is allocated 2048 kbps The unbudgeted 2048 kbps allows traffic not defined in any of the bandwidth filters to go out when you do not select the maximize bandwidth option Table 86 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration 2048 kbps Sales 2048 kbps Marketing 2048 kbps Research 2048 kbps The P 660HWP Dx divides up the unbudgeted 2048 kbps among the classes that require more bandwidth If the administration department only uses 1024 kbps of the budgeted 2048 kbps the P 660HWP Dx also divides the remaining 1024 kbps among the classes that require more bandwidth Therefore the P 660HWP Dx divides a total of 3072 kbps of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth among the classes that require more bandwidth 15 6 2 1 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth The following table shows the priorities of the bandwidth classes and the amount of bandwidth that each class gets Table 87 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example BANDWIDTH CLASSES PRIORITIES AND ALLOTMENTS Root Class 10240 kbps Administration Priority 4 1024 kbps Sales Priority 6 3584 kbps Marketing Priority 6 3584 kbps
126. 64 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 165 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS AppRess ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 The following table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 166 Class C Subnet Planning NO BORROWED HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SOBNET PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of th
127. 660HWP Dx s WAN Internet access settings click Network gt WAN The screen differs by the encapsulation See Section 5 1 on page 35 for more information P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 45 Internet Connection PPPoE Internet Connection General Name nyrsP Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPOE v User Name Password SSF Service Name l Multiplexing ic Virtual Circuit ID VPI B VCI ls IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically C static IP Address IP Address o D Connection C Nailed Up Connection Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 sec Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Internet Connection LABEL DESCRIPTION General Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider e g MyISP This information is for identification purposes only Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE User Name PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the user name exactly a
128. 7 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs Import cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeseseneaacaeeeeeeeeess 210 Table 78 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts sss 211 Table 79 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Import sss 212 Table 80 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Details sss 213 Table 81 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers 1iessccceiene trt ttun ER rta Eb g a ER bbb qa EE ERPE E MHaS ER Uode 215 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Tables Table 82 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Server gt Add ccccccccccsesseeeeceeeseeeeceeenseeeeeesenseseeeeeeeneees 216 jode nil tec das ek agri T ITA OAE abba cata ATEOA A EI O VITEN N 220 Table 64 Static Route Edil secsestccseccsnnrtaduce 221 Table 85 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example suuusssss 224 Table 86 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example utin kpreice nut ker Eoi ak FeFE e SER CHEODI ME EF Hu oo REE HELL dE GERE HEU 226 Table 87 Priority based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example 226 Table 88 Fairness based Allotment of Unused and Unbudgeted Bandwidth Example 227 Table 89 Bandwidth Management PHOIT BB sc iaissscaweiiiesaarnciuceniauenningard neduaacitmmuddoarinmbaraeninetacaaantie
129. 71 Coment Fiker TUSTE qm 193 Figure 112 Certificates on Your Computer 1o cierran xs nada ae ERR RR Rara Gach en dan s id eR pA A Ka 196 Foe TR Oaia DoE re 197 Figure 114 Certificate Configuration Overview 225i erigere y ren et p d nn d enl y nt ES nEn Ra 4 ERR 197 Figure 115 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates eeeeeener rentum ken tana nita nana Eua na 198 Figure 116 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create eeeeeeceseeeeeeeeennne nena 202 Figure 117 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Import eeeeeeseseeeeenenen nnne 205 Figure 118 Security gt Certificates Trusted GE icc Erbe c dtr be tbi eq E EEr p raidir ini n p V SERE aiaa 206 Figure 119 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAS gt Details cesses ecce ennemi 207 Figure 120 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Import eeeeeseeees sesenta nnn 210 Figure 121 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts essent nnn 210 Figure 122 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Import ssssssseees 212 Figure 123 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Details ssesseeeesess 213 Figure 124 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers oeecceeeeseceennne irent tetti tea aa an 215 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Figures
130. A B C D E and F P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client Then they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network 7 3 3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it This is called user authentication However every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802 1x to do this For wireless networks there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user e n the AP this feature is called a local user database or a local database na RADIUS server this is a server used in businesses more than in homes If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network even if they cannot use the wireless network Furthermore there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password Then they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network Local user databases also have an additional limi
131. Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting cccccccccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 305 Append B Wireless LANG usare nisi ChEEECUKEERERWE PREYEEIA FEY TREHEEERUOR iR EY LUE FI DXRTR TURPE GA 311 Bpod C mtema SP TOEN i bor iene FERE EE Fe Ebo CL COR RR HD Ee 0 325 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address sssssseemm HH 341 Fosse ipei d E IFP oa IG TTL T LITT MTS our Appendix F Command Interpreter usen bk HE pREYEEREOHFEDHEOEDREHERERT DET PRAYER E EVIL ERE URL tla 365 Appendix G Firewall COommabiedsosonsverekivr bk vH EKERE PEOR ai ona NE RH DEF Ob ia OEC ua 369 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 375 Appendix I NetBIOS Filter Cammimstidbsscncxnekek beer OR FeKEEGOK FEE EYCHERTK FIRE DEL Tar n HO CH Hen 381 Append J Mangle PROEIB a ovii REPRE REPRE TEFREEEEER a EA FA REX 383 Append K Legal BIOCTSUGELadddexd rs Here EETEEEHEREDERT a E EB FR UE rH Ee RR 385 Appendix E Gustemer SUDDOIT audiui exoyEekEE ERD EE A HEEREYEEEREEEEREEPUER TEE ERE TEUER EET NE ERR ERE HR 389 p e 395 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1 Protected Internet Access Applications cccccccescececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneesineeeeeeess 36 Figure 2 LAN to LAN Ap
132. Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP IP properties Figure 211 Red Hat 9 0 Checking TCP IP Properties root localhost ifconfig etho Link encap Ethernet HWaddr 00 50 BA 72 5B 44 inet addr 172 23 19 129 Bceast 172 23 19 255 Mask 255 255 255 0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU 1500 Metric 1 RX packets 717 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 frame 0 TX packets 13 errors 0 dropped 0 overruns 0 carrier 0 collisions 0 txqueuelen 100 RX bytes 730412 713 2 Kb TX bytes 1570 1 5 Kb Interrupt 10 Base address 0x1000 root localhost P 660HWP Dx User s Guide IP Subnetting This appendix introduces addresses IP address classes and subnet masks Introduction to IP Addresses An IP address is made up of four octets written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 An octet is an 8 digit binary number Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 256 in decimal An IP address has two parts the network number and the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID identifies a single device on the network IP Address Classes and Hosts The class of an IP address determines the number of hosts you can have on your network Inaclass A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets are the host ID
133. Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the P 660HWP Dx sends to the DHCP client devices on the LAN Figure 57 DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Pool Size DNS Server DHCP Setup IP Pool Starting Address Remote DHCP Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Server 192 168 1 33 32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Table 28 DHCP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Setup DHCP If set to Server your P 660HWP Dx can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the P 660HWP Dx acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case When DHCP is used the following items need to be set IP Pool Starting Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Pool Size This field specifies the size or count of th
134. CMP packet ICMP The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender Table 117 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION board d line d channel d The router received the setup requirements for a call call is call d s C01 Outgoing Call the reference count number of the call dev is the device type 3 is for dial up 6 is for PPPoE 10 is for PPTP channel or ch is the call channel ID For example board 0 line O channel 0 call 3 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times dev x ch Sx s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call is connected call d s C02 OutCall Connected d s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call was disconnected call d s CO2 Call Terminated Table 118 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION ppp LCP Starting The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage has started ppp LCP Opening The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is opening ppp CHAP Opening The PPP connection s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening ppp IPCP The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting Starting ppp IPCP Opening The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening Ppp LCP Closing The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is closing ppp IPCP Closing The PPP connection s Interne
135. Can soiien duiken aa ia eiaatuuiectaaunnnrenmanssuusinnwit ei Nadasis 359 Tade 159 SUBNET c 360 TaS TOSUN ee mE 360 TAS TET SUNET etr 361 VME 102 SUBNET c 361 WHE TOS UES aoaaa A E A E Re UR ORE V iu eia cprenbenl cousin CMud heb EE RUNE CHUA E EA UE 361 Table TEC SUD ususidtsagrbditi eni ian or b AME MM Mn Ei iMi 361 Tab Vote Elli SUDDEIS oie addi o E e o D pni pu e t ere Peer erat rere pue 362 Table 166 Class C Subnet Planning 22 sedan aciei nie Fei dad haad nha dk kh be oa ain odd a 362 Table 167 Class B Subnet PIANWNG c 362 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Tables Table 168 Firewall Commands Table 169 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings ices cscccteracisanetsanneanertecassendecsaasinanacanainntadacennsanadian ERR d ik 382 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Tables P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART Introduction Introducing the P 660HWP Dx 35 Introducing the Web Configurator 43 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx This chapter introduces the main applications and features of the P 660HWP Dx It also introduces the ways you can manage the P 660HWP Dx 1 1 Overview The P 660HWP Dx is an IEEE 802 11b g wireless ADSL2 gateway that allows super fast secure Internet access over analog POTS digital ISDN telephone lines depending on your model or by wireless It also complies with the HomePlug AV sta
136. Chapter 6 LAN Setup 6 4 DHCP Setup Table 27 Advanced LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the Active check box to enable the Any IP feature This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer even when the IP addresses of the computer and the P 660HWP Dx are not in the same subnet When you disable the Any IP feature only computers with dynamic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx s LAN IP address can connect to the P 660HWP Dx or access the Internet through the P 660HWP Dx Windows NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP packets that Networking enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up NetBIOS over services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls TCP IP However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN Allow between Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and LAN and WAN from the WAN to the LAN If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN
137. Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 5 Click Apply to save your wireless LAN settings Figure 37 Wireless LAN Setup 3 STEP 1 STEP 2 fi Wireless LAN Please Click the Apply Button to re the W s LAN settings Note If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Apply Button Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process se a ea 6 Use the read only summary table to check whether what you have configured is correct Click Finish to complete and save the wizard setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 47 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 38 Internet Access and Wireless Wizard Setup Complete CONGRATULATIONS The Internet Wir tup configuration is complete Here are your current settings Mode Routing Encapsulation ENET ENCAP Multipl Bae PI CI Network Name SSID ZyXEL Channel Selection Security Disable wi ecurity Finish button to e this wizard or click the following link to open other pages Return to Wizard Main Page Go to Advanced Setup Page 7 Launch your web browser and navigate to www zyxel com Internet access is just the beginning Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complet
138. DSL over ISDN digital telephone service only The following is an example installation for the P 660HWP Dx with ISDN P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx Figure 7 P 660HWP Dx with ISDN Splitter P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy P 660HWP Dx setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default See the chapter on troubleshooting if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer 2 2 Accessing the Web Configurator BS Even though you can connect to the P 660HWP Dx wirelessly it is recommended that you connect your computer to a LAN port for initial configuration 1 Make sure your P 660HWP Dx hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Prepare your comput
139. Day Month Year The date format here is Month Day Year The time format is Hour Minute Second aM End of Log message shows that a complete log has been sent P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Figure 164 E mail Log Example Subject Firewall Alert From xxxxx Date Fri From 128 End Apr 10 user zyxel com user zyxel com 7 54 05 07 Apr 2000 10 05 42 00 From 192 168 1 1 00 From 192 168 1 131 00 From 192 168 1 1 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 03 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 00 00 From 192 168 1 131 To 192 168 1 255 default policy forward 17 UDP src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 00 00 From 192 168 1 6 To 10 10 10 10 match forward 19 UDP src port 03516 dest port 00053 1 01 nM STEED oe edt CAPETA ESTA D3 d oin et dens To2192 168 14 255 match forward src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 To2192 168 1 255 match forward src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 Tco 192 16871 255 match forward 00 From 192 168 1 1 30 UDP of Firewall Log src port 00520 dest port 00520 1 02 20 4 Log Descriptions This section provides descriptions of example log messages Table 111 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION successful Time calibration is The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server Time calibration failed The router failed to g
140. Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 15 11 Bandwidth Monitor To view the P 660HWP Dx s bandwidth usage and allotments click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Monitor The screen appears as shown Select an interface from the drop down list box to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth rules The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use The screen refreshes every few seconds Figure 134 Bandwidth Management Monitor Monitor Lan z To LAN Interface Wey Wy FTP E Mail Telnet NetMeeting H 323 VoIP SIP VoIP H 323 TFTP Table 96 Bandwidth Management Monitor LABEL DESCRIPTION Monitor This section allows you to select which network to monitor You may select either a LAN WLAN or WAN After selecting a network to monitor information on active services and their bandwidth usage appears P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your P 660HWP Dx to use Dynamic DNS 16 1 Dynamic DNS Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your
141. EL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route Leave this field blank to delete this static route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same Address network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Back Click Back to return to the previous screen without saving Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 14 Static Route P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Bandwidth Management This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management editing rules and viewing the P 660HWP Dx s bandwidth management logs 15 1 Bandwidth Management Overview ZyXEL s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and or subnet You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth
142. Ea a 244 Figure 141 Remote Management SNMP uiscera hn ta te a n E a Pad e t d e EXER ESAE d 245 Figure 142 Remote Management DNS Luussecenusse sten kem dp ttt ki ER a d a Iu ki RR LA RA E AR ER 247 Figure 143 Remote Management ICMP 1 iisceseeni iier cebaci et rbrtn baci vro tiep tbt dk btt ke ii 248 Figue TRENDNI TROC uoseod iixedasc boe ete od tico asd tion o Ga Feu D Rt E d dt RR 249 gd ale om iee li Teh a eS gr deem rc em 252 Figure 146 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication seseeessssss 253 Figure 147 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components 254 Figure 149 ue d4den rio e rmm 254 Figure 149 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard sssseeeen 255 Figure 150 Nelworking Sonics sisson aie nd adi eae Een di Rada eka Lea c Sah nean E d d d 255 Figure 151 Network sinc Me 256 Figure 152 Internet Connection PIODBIELBE lt ccissssscxesisssssseessascancetnasoiend eens nsart FERRO ILLE EE RE LA S FR d 257 Figure 153 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings cccccccceeseecccceeteeeraneeeeeenaeeneneeas 257 Figure 154 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add ssessssssss 258 Figure 195 System Tray ICON EI E chase via tea T UT TT 258 Figur 196 Internet Connection SAS 2 ceoscanaisentatua ts Frbncve the lnteci a ub v PU adeo ae cL EHE v EV EUR OE upR LU va
143. Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown Figure 204 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Ethernet Device General WY Ethernet Device General Route Hardware Device Nickname ethO 4 Activate device when computer starts Allow all users to enable and disable the device Automatically obtain IP address settings with dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname optional Automatically obtain DNS information from provider Statically set IP addresses Manual IP Address Settings Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address 3 Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 47 Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhep from the drop down list Ifyou have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address Subnet mask and Default Gateway Address fields Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen 4 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Co Figure 205 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DNS File Profile Help 689 New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may configure the system s hostname domain name serv
144. HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 105 Firewall Example Edit Rule Select Customized Services Edit Rule 2 M Active Action for Matched Packets Permit 7 Source Address Source Address List Address Type Any Address Start IP ooo Any Address AA _Add gt gt diese o i Edit lt Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Delete Destination Address Destination Address List Address Type Range Address 7 Start IP 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 15 Address End IP Roo0415 Address ERU Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Service Available Services Selected Services Any AI MyService TCP LIDP 123 Any CMP _Add gt gt AIMNEVY ICQ TCP 5190 AUTH TCP 113 HESS BGP TCP 179 gt Edit Customized Services Schedule Day to Apply iv Everyday IV sun IV Mon IV Tue IV wed IV Thu IV Fri IV sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format M all day Stardo hour minute Endja hour minute Log Log Packet Detail Information Alert I Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched Cancel On completing the configuration procedure for this Internet firewall rule the Rules screen should look like the following Rule 1 allows a MyService connection from the WAN to IP addresses 10 0 0 10 through 10 0 0 15 on the LAN P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 106 Firewall Example Rules MyService o RII Rules oo Packet Directio
145. HWP Dx s log settings Tools Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your P 660HWP Dx Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your P 560HWP Dx Restart This screen allows you to reboot the P 660HWP Dx without turning the power off Diagnostic General These screens display information to help you identify problems with the P 660HWP Dx general connection DSL Line These screens display information to help you identify problems with the DSL line 2 4 2 Status Screen The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen Some fields or links are not available if you entered the user password in the login password screen see Figure 8 on page 36 Not all fields are available on all models Figure 13 Status Screen Device Information Host Name Model Number MAC Address P 660HWP D1 00 13 49 75 75 44 ZyNOS Firmware Version V3 40 4PD 0 b1 01 04 2007 Refresh Interval None z Apply System Uptime 5 51 56 Current Date Time 01 01 2000 05 55 04 System Mode Routing Bridging CPU Usage E 3 51 DSL Firmware Version WAN Information DSL Mode NORMAL IP Address 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VPI VCI 8 35 LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server WLAN Information SSID ZyXEL Channel
146. IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your P 660HWP Dx in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your P 660HWP Dx and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Linux This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9 0 Procedure screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Using the K Desktop Environment KDE Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE 1 Click the Red Hat button located on the bottom left corner select System Setting and click Network Figure 203 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Devices v Wel LL x File Profile Help f BOB Ff x New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts jac You may configure network devices associated with a5 physical hardware here Multiple logical devices can be associated with a single piece of hardware Profile Status Device Nickname Type X Inactive ethO ethO Ethemet 2 Double click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure The
147. IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src IP address 0 0 0 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 149 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 1 continued 210101009 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Subnet Mask 0 210101010 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Port 0 210101011 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Src Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 0 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210101013 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Act Match lt 1 check 3 next 2 forward 3 drop gt 210101014 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Act Not Match lt 1 check 1 next 2 forward 3 drop gt Menu 21 1 1 2 set 1 rule 2 FI F PVA INPUT 210102001 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Type lt 2 TCP IP gt ec 210102002 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt es 210102003 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Protocol 6 210102004 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest IP address 0 0 0 0 210102005 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Subnet 0 Mask 210102006 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Port 138 210102007 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Dest Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 1 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210102008 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src IP address 0 0 0 0 210102009 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Subnet Mask 210102010 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Port 0 210102011 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 2 Src Port Comp lt 0
148. IPTION Config edit firewall set set This command sets how long P 660HWP Dx 4 tcp idle timeout seconds lets an inactive TCP connection remain open before considering it closed Config edit firewall set set This command sets whether or not the P gt log yes no 660HWP Dx creates logs for packets that match the firewall s default rule set Rules Config edit firewall set set This command sets whether packets that match this rule are dropped or allowed through Config edit firewall set set f rule rule gt active yes no This command sets whether a rule is enabled or not Config edit firewall set set f rule rule gt protocol integer protocol value gt This command sets the protocol specification number made in this rule for ICMP Config edit firewall set set gt rule rule gt log none match not match both This command sets the P 660HWP Dx to log traffic that matches the rule doesn t match both or neither Config edit firewall set set gt rule rule gt alert yes no This command sets whether or not the P 660HWP Dx sends an alert e mail when a DOS attack or a violation of a particular rule occurs config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr single lt ip address gt This command sets the rule to have the P 660HWP Dx check for traffic with this individual source address conf
149. IV use All Managed Bandwidth Enable DiffServ Marking DiffServ mark Filter Configuration Service Destination Address Destination Subnet Netmask Destination Port Source Address Source Subnet Netmask Source Port Protocol TOS Type of Service TOS Mask E Mail fio Kbps uia z B8H DSCP EF User defined ooo ooo ooo nono 110 TCP o 0 255 o o 255 Apply rF Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Configuration Active Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx apply this bandwidth management rule Enable a bandwidth management rule to give traffic that matches the rule priority over traffic that does not match the rule Enabling a bandwidth management rule also allows you to control the maximum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches the rule Rule Name Use the auto generated name or enter a descriptive name of up to 20 alphanumeric characters including spaces BW Budget Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual rule Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Use All Managed Bandwidth
150. Internet Explorer 2 This screen appears while OTIST settings are being transferred It closes when the transfer is complete Figure 71 OTIST in Progress AP OTIST Auto Security in Process Please wait a moment about 149 Seconds P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 72 OTIST in progress Client OTIST OTIST in progress please wait for 3 minutes In the wireless client you see this screen if it can t find an OTIST enabled AP with the same Setup key Click OK to go back to the ZyXEL utility main screen Figure 73 No AP with OTIST Found Please make sure you have ZyXEL g APs or wireless routers with OTIST function enabled OK fthere is more than one OTIST enabled AP within range you see a screen asking you to select one AP to get settings from 7 5 3 Notes on OTIST 1 If you enabled OTIST in the wireless client you see this screen each time you start the utility Click Yes for it to search for an OTIST enabled AP Figure 74 Start OTIST Do you wantto start OTIST function Na Don t show me this window again 2 Ifan OTIST enabled wireless client loses its wireless connection for more than ten seconds it will search for an OTIST enabled AP for up to one minute If you manually have the wireless client search for an OTIST enabled AP there is no timeout click Cancel in the OTIST progress screen to stop the search 3 When the wireless client finds an
151. LEDs are behaving as expected see Section 1 4 on page 37 Ensure that your VoIP account is correctly configured If you are using Network Address Translation NAT make sure that Enable SIP ALG is activated in the NAT gt General screen See Section 9 3 on page 146 Ensure STUN is turned off on your VoIP device If you are using a new VoIP account contact your Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP to ensure that it is activated e cannot access the Internet anymore I had access to the Internet with the P 660HWP Dx but my Internet connection is not available anymore hk OND Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 4 on page 37 Reboot the P 660HWP Dx Turn the P 660HWP Dx off and on If the problem continues contact your ISP e The Internet connection is slow or intermittent A ON There might be a lot of traffic on the network Look at the LEDs and check Section 1 4 on page 37 If the P 660HWP Dx is sending or receiving a lot of information try closing some programs that use the Internet especially peer to peer applications Reboot the P 660HWP Dx Turn the P 660HWP Dx off and on If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 23 Troubleshooting Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for bandwidth manag
152. Lmdlbi5jZXJOMBIGA1UdEwEBAAQIMAYBAfSC AQEvDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEFBOADOOBHAP6DriCOHsugLf6Rhb4MtLOmUNWFGw gpY P1G 3kH4Sd40bOOxSsNXx7rd5qGjEJnzPrl4TScB7hJiJQff P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 47 Chapter 13 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate You may use any character not including spaces Property Check incoming certificates issued by this CA against a CRL Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List CRL Clear this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx not check incoming certificates that are issued by this certification authority against a Certificate Revocation List CRL Certification Path Click the Refresh button to have this read only text box display the end entity s certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entity s certificate If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority it may be the only certification authority in the list along with
153. MD authentication has some weaknesses Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords the passwords must be stored Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file In addition it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MDS authentication method does not perform mutual authentication Finally MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption EAP TLS Transport Layer Security With EAP TLS digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication The server presents a certificate to the client After validating the identity of the server the client sends a different certificate to the server The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender s identity However to implement EAP TLS you need a Certificate Authority CA to handle certificates which imposes a management overhead EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Service EAP TTLS is an extension of the EAP TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server side authentications to establish a secure connection Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection thus
154. MP RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 2766 Network Address Translation Protocol RFC 2865 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service IEEE 802 11 Also known by the brand Wi Fi denotes a set of Wireless LAN WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 IEEE 802 11b Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Uses the 2 4 gigahertz GHz band IEEE 802 11g Turbo and Super G modes IEEE 802 11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks Media Access Control MAC Bridges IEEE 802 11e QoS IEEE 802 11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service IEEE 802 11i WPA2 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 138 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control ANSI 11 413 Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line ADSL standard G dmt G 992 1 G 992 1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL Transceivers ITU G 992 1 G DMT ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation ITU G 992 3 G dmt bis ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates ITU G 992 5 ADSL2 ITU standard also referred to as ADSL2 that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the
155. Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP_TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 41 Commonly Used Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 Th
156. P 660HWP Dx 802 11g HomePlug AV ADSL2 Gateway User s Guide Version 3 40 7 2007 Edition 1 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the P 660HWP Dx using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information LES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the P 660HWP Dx e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These ar
157. P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The P 660HWP Dx supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the P 660HWP Dx queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the P 660HWP Dx periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the P 660HWP Dx LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 6 2 4 Any IP Traditionally you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the P 660HWP Dx to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the P 660HWP Dx In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the P 660HWP Dx With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the P 660HWP Dx allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP address
158. P Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN BS If you hold in the RESET button too long the device will reset to the factory defaults 7 5 1 1 2 Web Configurator Click the Network gt Wireless LAN gt OTIST The following screen displays Figure 68 OTIST OTIST OTIST Setup Key Yes Please enhance the Wireless Security Level to WPA PSK automatically if no WLAN security has been set This will generate a random PSK key for your convenience Start The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 OTIST LABEL DESCRIPTION Setup Key Type an OTIST Setup Key of exactly eight English keyboard characters in length The default OTIST setup key is 01234567 Note If you change the OTIST setup key here you must also make the same change on the wireless client s Yes If you want OTIST to automatically generate a WPA PSK you must Change your security to any security other than WPA PSK in the Wireless LAN gt General screen Select the Yes checkbox in the OTIST screen and click Start The wireless screen displays an auto generated WPA PSK and is now in WPA PSK security mode The WPA PSK security settings are assigned to the wireless client when you start OTIST Note If you already have a WPA PSK configured in the Wireless LAN General screen and you run OTIST with Yes selected OTIST will use the existing WPA PSK Sta
159. P Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 8 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode From the Mode drop down list box select Routing default if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplexing Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based Virtual Circuit VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit ID Refer to the appendix for more information VPI Enter the VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured Back Click Back to go back to the previous screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes 2 The next wizard screen varies depending on wha
160. PTION Backup Configuration Backup Click Backup to save the current configuration to your computer Restore Configuration P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 37 Chapter 21 Tools LABEL DESCRIPTION Upload Restore your router to a previous configuration by uploading a previously saved configuration file from your computer Reset to Factory Default Settings Reset Clear all settings entered by the user and return the router to its original factory specified configuration 21 2 2 Restore Configuration Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your P 660HWP Dx Table 132 Maintenance Restore Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed ZIP files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Do not turn off the P 660HWP Dx while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a Restore Configuration successful screen you must then wait one minute before logging into the P 660HWP Dx again Figure 170 Configuration Restore Successful Restore Configuration successful The Router Is Rebooting Now Please Wait The router will n
161. RIPTION Application Priority Configuration Name Type a description of the application priority Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS Select a service from the drop down list box FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail FTP uses port number 21 E Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals Here are some default ports for e mail POP3 port 110 IMAP port 143 SMTP port 25 HTTP port 80 WWW The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser User Defined User defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port See table Table 41 on page 53 for information on port numbers Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 43 A
162. RL before trusting any certificates issued by the certification authority Otherwise the field displays No P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 75 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Modify Click the details icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Use the export icon to save the certificate to a computer Click the icon and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save Click the delete icon to remove the certificate A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificates Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust from your computer to the P 560HWP Dx Refresh Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates 13 10 Trusted CA Details Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen Click the edit icon to open the Trusted CA Details screen Use this screen to view in depth information about the certification authority s certificate change the certificate s name and set whether or not you want the P 660HWP Dx to check a certification authority s list of revoked certificates before trusting a cer
163. Refresh Self signed X 509 Certificate v3 946684807 CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate rsa pkcsi shai 2000 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT 2030 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT rsaEncryption 512 bits EMAIL factory auto gen cert DigitalSignature KeyEncipherment KeyCertSign Subject Type CA Path Length Constraint 1 8a ba 17 98 3d 34 95 66 57 53 bd b3 0a cb d2 62 58 5f 77 4c 0f 98 96 ff 09 45 3e 1c 3d d4 0b 38 36 88 44 ad MIIBODCCAUqgAwIBAgIEOG1DhzANBgkqhkiG9w BAQUFADAyMTAwLgYDVQODEydQ LTYZMEhXUCIEMSBGYWN b3J5IERlzmFlbHOogQ2VydGlmaWNhdGUwHhcNMDAwMTAx MDAwMDAwWhcNMzAwMTAxMDAwMDAWwW AyMTAwLgYDVOODEydQLTY2MEhXUClEMSBG YWN b3JSIERIlZmFi1bHQgQ2VydGlmaWNhdGUwXDANBgkqhkiG9w BAQEFAANLADBI AkEAnSwlFMUhCSHNaJe3TfNyforBxp6ZD47SKE35CjBldjwMrBhqXEkXUUutX71I1 Nok8PB6x7pIiZ lQAxafUSMArQIDAQABO qwRjAOBgNVHQB8BAQAEBAMCAqQwIAYD VR RBBkwF 4EVZmF jdG9yeUBhdXRvLmdlbi5jzXJ MBIGAlUdEwEBAAQIMAYBAfB8C AQEwDQYJKOoZIhvcNAQEFBQADQOBHAP6DrlCO HsugLf6Rhb4MtL mUNWFGw6jgpYb PlG4 3kH S8d4 0bO 0xSsNXx7rd5qGjEJnzPrM TScB7hJiJQff 4 Back Export Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Certificate Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this certificate You may use any character
164. Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix L Customer Support P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index A AALS 82 access point see AP address assignment 100 Address Resolution Protocol see ARP ADSL standards 36 ADSL line reinitialize 296 ADSL standards 36 Advanced Encryption Standard See AES AES 320 alerts 271 ALG 146 alternative subnet mask notation 359 antenna directional 323 gain 323 omni directional 323 antenna gain 122 Any IP 103 307 how it works 104 note 104 Any IP Setup 105 AP 111 AP access point 313 application layer gateway 146 Application Layer Gateway See ALG application level firewalls 158 ARP 104 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 see AALS ATM loopback test 296 attack alert 188 attack types 162 attacks 271 auxiliary gateway 307 Index B backup gateway 307 backup settings 291 backup type 96 bandwidth 73 budget 230 bandwidth management 73 223 bandwidth manager class configuration 229 monitor 234 summary 228 Basic Service Set See BSS 311 Basic wireless se
165. Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 194 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties s Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sak Q 27 Search le Folders E Address Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet v Network Tasks ocal Area Connection E Create a new connection Set up a home or small Disable office network Disable this network pa device Repair EN Repair this connection ard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Bridge Connections mj Rename this connection view status of this connection Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut Rename 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and then click Properties Figure 195 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties 4 Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using HE Accton ENI 207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter This connection uses the following items E Client for Microsoft Networks v A File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks w jl onc dulo v Internet Protocol TCP IP ee amp iwi MELDE RN m7 ae 5 Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area net
166. SAGE DESCRIPTION Facility 8 Severity Mon dd This message is sent by the system RAS displays as hr mm ss hostname src srcIP srcPort router generates a syslog The facility is defined in the web dst lt dstIP dstPort gt msg lt msg gt note lt note gt devID lt mac address last three the system name if you haven t configured one when the MAIN MENU gt LOGS gt Log Settings page The severity is the log s syslog class The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix The devID is the last three characters of the numbers gt cat lt category gt MAC address of the router s LAN port The cat is the same as the category in the router s logs The following table shows RFC 2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type Table 129 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SA Security Association PROP Proposal TRANS Transform KE Key Exchange ID Identification CER Certificate CER_REQ Certificate Request HASH Hash SIG Signature NONCE Nonce NOTFY Notification DE Delete VID Vendor ID P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs 52 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Tools This chapter describes how to upload new firmware manage configuration and resta
167. SK Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Security Security Mode YPA2 PSK z wPA Compatible Pre Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer 1800 In Seconds Idle Timeout 3600 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer 1800 In Seconds Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 35 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 PSK LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the drop down list box WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the P G60HWP Dx even when the P 660HWP Dx is using WPA2 PSK or WPA2 Pre Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA WPA2 and WPA PSK WPA2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA PSK WPA2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials Type a pre shared key from 8 to 63 case sensitive English keyboard characters including spaces and symbols ReAuthentication Specify how often wireless clients have to resend usernames and passwords in Timer In order to stay connected Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds The Seconds default time interval is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Note If wireless client
168. Select this option to allow a rule to borrow unused bandwidth on the interface Bandwidth borrowing is governed by the priority of the rules That is a rule with the highest priority is the first to borrow bandwidth Do not select this if you want to leave bandwidth available for other traffic types or if you want to restrict the amount of bandwidth that can be used for the traffic that matches this rule Enable DiffServ Marking Select this option to enable DiffServ marking on the P 560HWP Dx DiffServ mark Select the marking rule from the drop down list The first three digits are the DiffServ code point A packet with the lowest priority mark will be dropped when the line is busy Filter Configuration Service This field simplifies bandwidth class configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application When you select a predefined application you do not configure the rest of the bandwidth filter fields other than enabling or disabling the filter SIP Session Initiation Protocol is a signaling protocol used in Internet telephony instant messaging and other VoIP Voice over IP applications Select SIP from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses SIP File Transfer Protocol FTP is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP IP networks A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client The service
169. Service Set a a o een An Extended Service Set ESS consists of a series of overlapping BSSs each containing an access point with each access point connected together by a wired network This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System DS This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood An ESSID ESS IDentification uniquely identifies each ESS All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Figure 180 Infrastructure WLAN Ethernet wow ORE Se S E x mE MUS NUN de ae ne ITI SmSm oe oe gt d Deos Ba Ds ary se ee ar XS AP 1 PN AP 2 soe s x m z Y 4 v En A a iic a i i H i H i b 2 BSS 2 2 A l EX E 3f E y Ne eet N ONE BSS 1 on t Mg B o or Ax C PAM Dan o aan oo mam dan ano 3 2 eee ser Snannnnonnnen nor ias ESS ae gt PSone ty ate se gt S eee Channel A channel is the radio frequency ies used by IEEE 802 11a b g wireless devices Channels available depend on your geographical area You may have a choice of channels for your regi
170. TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 Net Meeting uses this protocol P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Table 64 Predefined Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IPSEC TRANSPORT TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service IPSEC_TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that pro
171. The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP When a UPnP device joins a network it announces its presence with a multicast message For security reasons the P 660HWP Dx allows multicast messages only on the LAN All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention You must have IIS Internet Information Services enabled on the Windows web server for UPnP to work 18 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports IGD 1 0 Internet Gateway Device See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP 18 2 1 Configuring UPnP Click Advanced gt UPnP to display the screen shown next See Section 18 1 on page 47 for more information Figure 145 Configuring UPnP UPnP Setup Device Name ZyXEL P 660HW D1 Internet Sharing Gateway Active the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Feature Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall q Note For UPnP to function normally
172. URE FUCO Ca Md ees IRA Sere eee Vete iax En eer nal ene EE RN UNUM rrr 271 TOOS 289 Boala S e EE EEEE E E EEE E AE T ENE A A E IA AE E E E T 295 PROMS QUU ee teh ealal aid but bean in etd fiiiqs 297 Appendices and RASH e 303 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Contents Overview P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Vs rs Ce toe 3 rere pip dr pid e a 4 Sary War S aa a ar rrrsricr nearer rn rere Tre 6 CONSE COVE POW P 9 El 1o ptpgl cd 11 stor ROWO qc 21 Hst of Tables MT 27 Part l Introduction E 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the P DBOFIWP DXX ica nnt ir akon noh cR Ran KR nesunan Kka c Kan co XM ERR FRE RRERM ER AKA 35 UEBER QU m pero Pee re er aE DeY PCED rer rtp nT Fee Carer ene Cg Tey Cer mene Pere aerrer eet er reer rare errr rrr 35 1 2 Ways to Manage die P CO0HWP DK sariren ebat ea ROM eu eia OR EO and ER OBb eque EON Sue Ee ed cop RR De TUA 37 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the P G60HWP DX isses ta trt rrr rnb apre ada 37 Dee N E E A A N T ATE E TEE EO ETA ETE TE TATR af 1 5 Hardware Connections siccssinescniecdecsestaanustsiceahieremteehemantiucismecdi asian atta 38 15 1 Goonpnecung a POTS OPIO ciate deas ERREOASRER THE
173. US Local gt 230400005 Key Management Protocol 0 8021x 1 WPA 0 2 WPAPSK gt 230400006 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange lt 0 Disable 1 64 0 bit WEP 2 128 bit WEP gt 230400007 PSK 230400008 WPA Mixed Mode lt 0 Disable 0 1 Enable gt 230400009 Data Privacy for Broadcast lt 0 TKIP 1 WEP gt 0 Multicast packets 230400010 WPA Broadcast Multicast Key Update 0 Timer Table 152 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Menu 24 11 Remot anagement Control FIN E PVA INPUT 241100001 TELNET Server Port 23 241100002 TELNET Server Access 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100003 TELNET Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 241100004 FTP Server Port 21 241100005 FTP Server Access lt 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100006 FTP Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 241100007 WEB Server Port 80 241100008 WEB Server Access lt 0 all 1 none 2 0 Lan 3 Wan gt 241100009 WEB Server Secured IP address 0 0 0 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Command Examples The following are example Internal SPTGEN screens associated with the P 660HWP Dx s command interpreter commands Table 153 Command Examples 2 gdmt 3 multimo de FIN FN
174. WP Dx check for TCP traffic with this single port 4 destination address You may repeat this command to enter various non consecutive port numbers config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P gt rule rule gt TCP destport 660HWP Dx check for TCP traffic with a range start port gt end port destination port in this range gt config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P gt rule rule gt UDP destport 660HWP Dx check for UDP traffic with this single port 4 destination address You may repeat this command to enter various non consecutive port numbers config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P 4 rule rule gt UDP destport 660HWP Dx check for UDP traffic with a range start port gt end port destination port in this range gt Delete config delete firewall e mail This command removes all of the settings for e mail alert config delete firewall attack This command resets all of the attack response settings to their defaults config delete firewall set set gt This command removes the specified set from the firewall configuration P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix G Firewall Commands Table 168 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config delete firewall set set gt rule lt rule gt
175. a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 5 2 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost The metric sets the priority for the P 660HWP Dx s routes to the Internet If any two of the default routes have the same metric the P 660HWP Dx uses the following pre defined priorities Normal route designated by the ISP see Section 5 5 on page 40 Traffic redirect route see Section 5 7 on page 49 WAN backup route also called dial backup see Section 5 8 on page 49 For example if the normal route has a metric of 1 and the traffic redirect route has a metric of 2 and dial backup route has a metric of 3 then the normal route acts as the primary default route If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet the P 660HWP Dx tries the traffic redirect route next In the same manner the P 660HWP Dx uses the dial backup route if the traffic redirect route also fails If you want the dial backup route to take first priority over the traffic redirect route or even the nor
176. aa e ppt tara iia 247 Table 104 Remote Management ICMP issue acbedeet ikea cotta edad pha daa ERR ehe Ea ka ng kd a EARE 248 Table TUS TRS Commies sssspteSqucHe TUE EPE EIE PRER IU EE CC EN E DERE REM IUE E PERI E MERE pA UI santana 249 Tablo 106 GoRNSUURS UP sched iato n bL ER i E a oon a et d o tS et eee 252 Table 107 System General Setup 1e ond Ebro bh lene cadeaa ebbe EE Net e ERO PR x EE Feb dnb a maada EE ona p on 266 Table 109 System Time Seting irrisica in in ne E E 268 TAS TOO VOW LOD 272 Table TOLO y us esee ecc N a eeemeieaeeuaee aaa 273 Table 111 System Maintenance LOGS iuis ccs daccs ottico aret tac Ett seats senciadiindaaniatetedinidebaaainaciuaiyeees 275 Table TTE Syslom Eror Logs seiersen a Cn ior ITNT Mr EH Een TQ bM aM Ct 276 Table TIS obese CODO LOGS catsiiudistixse viduis elites ete rede dum EPA T naan atae reu ce t epUM Eus Up cedit ddh 276 Tablo 114 TOI RS LOS aia ke p 41338 02 LISEE RECO SS RE UU A itg ret S V KR dat d dude 277 Toe Tio Packat FIE LOOS ER 277 Tabe 11 ICMP LOOS cesarean Gecessduevaisreisictonmnioneiseanede iana Da nE Nn eei iia i i 278 Tabi SUR LOTE eec aaa nose nee 278 Table Tie Bee LOD me 278 PADIS TIS UPIP 279 TE 120 Comnen Nn LE Mem 279 Table 2 PUER DOOR aasussestiudupisi tmo bh Ma RPM Nx ERU asset eee 280 Table 122 cubo o D 280 s eg doo RENE RENE RR T I 281 IC TAA PRILOGE e 284
177. able 90 Over Allotment of Bandwidth Example as Speed setting BANDWIDTH CLASSES ALLOTMENTS PRIORITIES Actual outgoing bandwidth available on the interface 1000 kbps Root Class 1500 kbps same VoIP traffic Service SIP 500 Kbps High NetMeeting traffic Service H 323 500 kbps High FTP Service FTP 500 Kbps Medium P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management If you use VoIP and NetMeeting at the same time the device allocates up to 500 Kbps of bandwidth to each of them before it allocates any bandwidth to FTP As a result FTP can only use bandwidth when VoIP and NetMeeting do not use all of their allocated bandwidth Suppose you try to browse the web too In this case VoIP NetMeeting and FTP all have higher priority so they get to use the bandwidth first You can only browse the web when VoIP NetMeeting and FTP do not use all 1000 Kbps of available bandwidth 15 8 Configuring Summary Click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT to open the screen as shown next Enable bandwidth management on an interface and set the maximum allowed bandwidth for that interface Figure 130 Bandwidth Management Summary Summary Summary BW Manager manages the bandwidth of traffic flowing out of the router on the specific interface BW Manager can be switched on off independently for each interface a EEUU o F LAN 5 ri o Cancel The following table describes the label
178. about the importance of security and how to minimize risk Produce lists like this one DSL or cable modem connections are always on connections and are particularly vulnerable because they provide more opportunities for hackers to crack your system Turn your computer off when not in use Never give out a password or any sensitive information to an unsolicited telephone call or e mail Never e mail sensitive information such as passwords credit card information etc without encrypting the information first Never submit sensitive information via a web page unless the web site uses secure connections You can identify a secure connection by looking for a small key icon on the bottom of your browser Internet Explorer 3 02 or better or Netscape 3 0 or better If a web site uses a secure connection it is safe to submit information Secure web transactions are quite difficult to crack Never reveal your IP address or other system networking information to people outside your company Be careful of files e mailed to you from strangers One common way of getting BackOrifice on a system is to include it as a Trojan horse with other files Change your passwords regularly Also use passwords that are not easy to figure out The most difficult passwords to crack are those with upper and lower case letters numbers and a symbol such as 96 or Upgrade your software regularly Many older versions of software especially web browsers have w
179. actically possible and free of obstructions In point to point application position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs For omni directional antennas mounted on a table desk and so on point the antenna up For omni directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling point the antenna down For a single AP application place omni directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible For directional antennas point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Internal SPTGEN This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage Actual menus for your product may differ Internal SPTGEN Overview Internal SPTGEN System Parameter Table Generator is a configuration text file useful for efficient configuration of multiple P 660HWP Dxs Internal SPTGEN lets you configure save and upload multiple menus at the same time using just one configuration text file eliminating the need to navigate and configure individual screens for each P 660HWP Dx You can use FTP to get the Internal SPTGEN file Then edit the file in a text editor and use FTP to upload it again to the same device or another one See the following sections for details The Configuration Text File Format All I
180. age that the P 660HWP Dx sends Not all ZyXEL models have this field Send Log To The P 660HWP Dx sends logs to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank the P 560HWP Dx does not send logs via e mail Send Alerts To Alerts are real time notifications that are sent as soon as an event such as a DoS attack system error or forbidden web access attempt occurs Enter the E mail address where the alert messages will be sent Alerts include system errors attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites If this field is left blank alert messages will not be sent via E mail P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 110 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet Authentication SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another User Name Enter the login name that your ISP gives you Password Enter the password associated with the user name Log Schedule This drop down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E mail Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None If you select Weekly or Daily specify a time of day when the E mail should be sent If you select Weekly then also specify which day of the week the E mail should be sent If you select When Log is Full an alert is sent when the log fills up If you select None no lo
181. al IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type M 1 Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only M M Ov Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses MM No No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing address mapping rule Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 9 7 1 Address Mapping Rule Edit To edit an address mapping rule click the rule s edit icon in the Address Mapping screen to display the screen shown next Figure 91 Edit Address Mapping Rule Edit Address Mapping Rule1 Type One to One Local Start IP 0 0 0 0 Local End IP N A Global Start IP 0 0 0 0 Global End IP N A Server Mapping Set na x Edit Details Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this
182. allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files Select FTP from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for FTP traffic H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service Select H 323 from the drop down list box to configure this bandwidth filter for traffic that uses H 323 Select User defined from the drop down list box if you do not want to use a predefined application for the bandwidth class When you select User defined you need to configure at least one of the following fields other than the Subnet Mask fields which you only enter if you also enter a corresponding destination or source IP address Destination Address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management Table 94 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination Subnet Netmask Enter the destination subnet mask This field is N A if you do not specify a Destination Address Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination See Table 95 on page 45 for some common services and port
183. alls To selectively block allow inbound or outbound traffic between inside host networks and outside host networks Remember that filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address The firewall performs better than filtering if you need to check many rules Use the firewall if you need routine e mail reports about your system or need to be alerted when attacks occur The firewall can block specific URL traffic that might occur in the future The URL can be saved in an Access Control List ACL database P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Firewall Configuration This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the P 660HWP Dx firewall 11 1 Access Methods The web configurator is by far the most comprehensive firewall configuration tool your P 660HWP Dx has to offer For this reason it is recommended that you configure your firewall using the web configurator CLI Command Line Interpreter commands provide limited configuration options and are only recommended for advanced users 11 2 Firewall Policies Overview Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply LAN to LAN Router WAN to LAN LAN to WAN WAN to WAN Router By default the P 660HWP Dx s stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions LAN to LAN Router This allows computers on the LAN to manage the P 660HWP Dx and communicate b
184. alue that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS Figure 44 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC SCR zm R lt gt Time 5 3 1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 Specification 5 3 1 1 Constant Bit Rate CBR Constant Bit Rate CBR provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent CBR traffic is generally time sensitive doesn t tolerate delay CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate cells may be dropped Examples of connections that need CBR would be high resolution video and voice 5 3 1 2 Variable Bit Rate VBR The Variable Bit Rate VBR ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate VBR traffic class can be grouped into real time VBR RT or non real time VBR nRT connections The VBR RT real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth a PCR is specified but is only available when data is being sent An example of an VBR RT connection would be video conferencing Video conferencing requires real time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in pr
185. anagement and select the priorities that you want to apply to the services listed P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard mjm jm m jm m LE Figure 42 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration sed on the applications and s es important to ach application you use and change the prio ting to match C High C Mid Low C High Mid C Low E Mail C High Mid C Low Telnet C High C Mid Low NetMeeting H 323 C High C Mid Low VoIP SIP High C Mid C Low VoIP H 323 C High C Mid Low TFTP C High C Mid Low Use Highs Mid or Eow ta prioritize the bandwidth for each service The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select an entry s Active check box to turn on bandwidth management for the service application Service These fields display the services names Priority Select High Mid or Low priority for each service to have your P 660HWP Dx use a priority for traffic that matches that service A service with High priority is given as much bandwidth as it needs If you select services as having the same priority then bandwidth is divided equally amongst those services Services not specified in bandwidth management are allocated bandwidth after all specified services receive their bandwidth requirements If the
186. aps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSDP UDP 1900 Simole Service Discovery Protocol SSDP is a discovery service searching for Universal Plug and Play devices on your home network or upstream Internet gateways using DUDP port 1900 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Table 64 Predefined Services continued SERVICE DESCRIPTION SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRMWORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 11 9 Anti Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your P 660HWP Dx an ICMP resp
187. aracters spaces are not permitted to identify this directory server Access Protocol Use the drop down list box to select the access protocol used by the directory server LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of certificates and lists of revoked certificates Server Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation or the domain name of the directory server Server Port This field displays the default server port number of the protocol that you select in the Access Protocol field You may change the server port number if needed however you must use the same server port number that the directory server uses 389 is the default server port number for LDAP Login Setting Login The P 660HWP Dx may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the directory server Type the login name up to 31 ASCII characters from the entity maintaining the directory server usually a certification authority Password Type the password up to 31 ASCII characters from the entity maintaining the directory server usually a certification authority Back Click Back to go to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the Directory Servers screen A At the time of writing LDAP is the only choice
188. are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities You can use the P 660HWP Dx to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority When using public key cryptology for authentication each host has two keys One key is public and can be made openly available the other key is private and must be kept secure Public key encryption for authentication works as follows 1 Tim wants to send a private message to Jenny Tim generates a public private key pair What is encrypted with one key can only be decrypted using the other Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available Tim uses his private key to encrypt the message and sends it to Jenny Jenny receives the message and uses Tim s public key to decrypt it a kk WS DN Additionally Jenny uses her own private key to encrypt a message and Tim uses Jenny s public key to decrypt the message The P 660HWP Dx uses certificates based on public key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection For example a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates Anyone can then use the certification au
189. are configuring the P 660HWP Dx from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 660HWP Dx s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P 660HWP Dx s new settings Click Network gt Wireless LAN to open the General screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 62 Wireless LAN General General Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz Security Security Mode No Security Apply Cancel Advanced Setup S The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen Table 32 Wireless LAN General LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Setup Active Wireless Click the check box to activate wireless LAN LAN Network Name Service Set IDentity The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless client SSID is associated Wireless clients associating to the access point AP must have the same SSID Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit English keyboard characters for the wireless LAN Note If you are configuring the P 660HWP Dx from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the P 660HWP Dx s SSID or WEP settings you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm Y
190. are different from WPA include key caching and pre authentication These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again Pre authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client already connecting to an AP to perform IEEE 802 1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA At the time of writing the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP Funk Software s Odyssey client The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP s built in Zero Configuration wireless client However you must run Windows XP to use it WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example You need the IP address of the RADIUS server its port number default is 1812 and the RADIUS shared secret A WPA 2 application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows A is the RADIUS server DS is the distribution system 1 The AP passes the wireless client s authentication request to the RADIUS serv
191. atch this rule Yes or not No Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action Order Click the Move icon to display the Move the rule to field Type a number in the Move the rule to field and click the Move button to move the rule to the number that you typed The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 6 1 Configuring Refer to Section Firewall Rules 10 1 on page 35 for more information In the Rules screen select an index number and click Add or click a rule s Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 99 Firewall Edit Rule Edit Rule 2 M Active Action for Matched Packets Permit Source Address Address Type any Address videt fo 0 0 0 Add gt gt Any End IP jos9 eem Wddress 0 0 0 0 Edit lt Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Delete Destination Address Source Address List Destination Address List Address Type any Address x es o 0 0 0 Add gt g
192. ate This is especially true of trusted CA certificates since the P 660HWP Dx also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates 13 3 1 Checking the Fingerprint of a Certificate on Your Computer A certificate s fingerprints are message digests calculated using the MD5 or SHA algorithms The following procedure describes how to check a certificate s fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer 2 Make sure that the certificate has a cer or crt file name extension Figure 112 Certificates on Your Computer hand EdLondon Office cer LA office crt Certificates 3 Double click the certificate s icon to open the Certificate window Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Figure 113 Certificate Details IX X General Details Certification Path Show lt ai gt Value Glenn RSA 1024 Bits Digital Signature Certificate Signing DNS Name Glenn Subject Type CA Path Length Cons shal BOA7 22B6 7960 FF92 52F4 6B4C A2 v LL 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields The secure method may very based on your situation Possible examples would be over the tel
193. ation class only uses 1024 kbps of its budgeted 2048 kbps The P 660HWP Dx divides the total 3072 kbps total of unbudgeted and unused bandwidth equally among the other classes 1024 kbps extra goes to each so the other classes each get a total of 3072 kbps 15 6 3 Bandwidth Management Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the P 660HWP Dx forwards out through an interface Table 89 Bandwidth Management Priorities PRIORITY LEVELS TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Mid Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Low This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users 15 7 Over Allotment of Bandwidth You can set the bandwidth management speed for an interface higher than the interface s actual transmission speed Higher priority traffic gets to use up to its allocated bandwidth even if it takes up all of the interface s available bandwidth This could stop lower priority traffic from being sent The following is an example T
194. ation server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server The default port number is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the P 660HWP Dx The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your P 660HWP Dx The key is not sent over the network Accounting Server optional IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server The default port number is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information Shared Secret Enter a password up to 31 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the P 660HWP Dx The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your P 660HWP Dx The key is not sent over the network Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and P 660HWP Dx User s Gui
195. ave an external RADIUS server or not Select WEP only when the AP and or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2 WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Encryption Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TKIP Message Integrity Check MIC and IEEE 802 1x WPA and WPA2 use Advanced Encryption Standard AES in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol CCMP to offer stronger encryption than TKIP TKIP uses 128 bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a block cipher that uses a 256 bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael They both include a per packet key mixing function a Message Integrity Check MIC named Michael an extended initialization vector IV with sequencing rules and a re keying mechanism WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key 1s never used twice The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients This all happens in the background automatically The Message Integrity Check MIC is designed to pr
196. blocks the traffic from A to B it also blocks the traffic from B to A Filters can not distinguish traffic originating from an inside host or an outside host by IP address To block allow IP trace route 10 7 2 Firewall The firewall inspects packet contents as well as their source and destination addresses Firewalls of this type employ an inspection module applicable to all protocols that understands data in the packet is intended for other layers from the network layer IP headers up to the application layer The firewall performs stateful inspection It takes into account the state of connections it handles so that for example a legitimate incoming packet can be matched with the outbound request for that packet and allowed in Conversely an incoming packet masquerading as a response to a nonexistent outbound request can be blocked The firewall uses session filtering i e smart rules that enhance the filtering process and control the network session rather than control individual packets in a session The firewall provides e mail service to notify you of routine reports and when alerts occur 10 7 2 1 When To Use The Firewall To prevent DoS attacks and prevent hackers cracking your network Arange of source and destination IP addresses as well as port numbers can be specified within one firewall rule making the firewall a better choice when complex rules are required P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firew
197. broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the P 660HWP Dx sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Multicasting can reduce the load on non router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets However if one router uses multicasting then all routers on your network must use multicasting also By default RIP direction is set to Both and the Version set to RIP 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Wireless LAN This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your P 660HWP Dx See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks 7 1 Wireless Network Overview The following figure provides an example of a wireless network Figure 61 Example of a Wireless Network ua The wireless network is the part in the blue circle In this wireless network devices A and B are called wireless clients The wireless clients use the access point AP to i
198. certificate Subject Information Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate You do not have to fill in every field although the Common Name is mandatory The certification authority may add fields such as a serial number to the subject information when it issues a certificate It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Common Name Select a radio button to identify the certificate s owner by IP address domain name or e mail address Host IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation domain name or e mail address in the field provided Host Domain Name Type the domain name here It can be up to 31 English keyboard characters long It is for identification purposes only and can be any string Email Type the email address here It can be up to 31 English keyboard characters long It is for identification purposes only and can be any string Organizational Unit Type up to 127 characters to identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the P 660HWP Dx drops trailing spaces Organization Type up to 127 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs You may use any character including spaces but the P 660HWP Dx drops trailing spaces Country Type up to 127 characters to identify the
199. ces the UPnP feature in the web configurator 18 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use See Section 18 2 1 on page 48 for configuration instructions 18 1 1 How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 18 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT 18 1 3 Cautions with UPnP
200. cess the P 660HWP Dx using this service Apply Click Apply to save your settings to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 3 Telnet You can configure administrator uses your P 660HWP Dx for remote Telnet access as shown next The Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the P 660HWP Dx Figure 137 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network gt 1 PA LE P4 T a Internet Sl gt amp jaannannnnnnnannannnnnaa Incoming Traffic User telnets into P 660HWP Dx User s Guide the LAN Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration 17 4 Configuring Telnet Click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt Telnet tab to display the screen as shown Figure 138 Remote Management Telnet q Note Telnet Port 23 Access Status LAN amp WAN Secured Client IP all C selected 0 0 0 0 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Remote Management Telnet LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the P 660HWP Dx using this ser
201. connection up all the time Demand and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout NAT NAT is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network None Select None to disable NAT SUA Only SUA only is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT Click Edit to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the More Connections Advanced screen and edit more details of your WAN setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 6 2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup Figure 49 More Connections Advanced Setup To edit your P 660HWP Dx s advanced WAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in the More Connections Edit screen The screen appears as shown RIP Direction RIP Version Multicast ATM Qos ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate RIP amp Multicast Setup Sustain Cell
202. creen allows you to configure ISP parameters WAN IP Connection address assignment DNS servers and other advanced properties More Connections Use this screen to view and configure other connections for placing calls to another remote gateway WAN Backup Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and Setup WAN backup settings LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN TCP IP settings enable Any IP and other advanced properties DHCP Setup Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP settings Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address and host name IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets Wireless LAN General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN OTIST Use this screen to enable OTIST MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the P 660HWP Dx to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the P 660HWP Dx Qos Use this screen to configure Wi Fi Multimedia Quality of Service WMM QoS WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services Powerline Local Setting Use this screen to configure the settings of your local power line enabled device Remote Setting Use this screen to configure the settings of other power line adapters on your power line network and set up a network Status Use this screen to view the status of your powe
203. cribes the labels in this screen Table 92 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Direction Select the direction of traffic to which you want to apply bandwidth management Service Select a service for your rule or you can select User Defined to go to the screen where you can define your own Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box Choose High Mid or Low Bandwidth kbps Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps The recommendation is a setting between 20 kbps and 20000 kbps for an individual Add Click this button to add a rule to the following table P 660HWP Dx User s Guide rule Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management Table 92 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule Active This displays whether the rule is enabled Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx apply this bandwidth management rule Enable a bandwidth management rule to give traffic that matches the rule priority over traffic that does not match the rule Enabling a bandwidth management rule also allows you to control the maximum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches the rule Rule Name This is the name of the rule Destination Port This is the port number of the destination O means any destination port Priority This is the priori
204. curity 70 blocking time 187 brute force attack 161 BSS 311 C CA 195 318 CBR 89 94 Certificate Authority See CA certificates 195 CA 195 thumbprint algorithms 196 thumbprints 196 verifying fingerprints 196 Certification Authority See CA certifications 385 notices 386 viewing 386 change password at login 45 changing the NMK 136 channel 111 313 interference 313 channel ID 116 Class of Service 230 Class of Service CoS 230 computer name 265 266 configuration 100 289 291 354 backup 291 restore 291 292 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index upload 293 configuration text file 325 connection failure 307 contact information 389 content filtering 191 categories 191 schedule 192 trusted computers 193 URL keyword blocking 191 Continuous Bit Rate see CBR copyright 385 CoS 230 CTS Clear to Send 314 custom ports creating editing 178 customer support 389 customized services 178 D date and time settings 267 default 293 default LAN IP address 43 default settings 291 293 Denial of Service see DoS destination address 171 detection 60 device model number 289 DHCP 100 101 235 265 diagnostic DSL line 296 general 295 Differentiated Services 230 DiffServ Code Point DSCP 230 DiffServ Code Points 230 DiffServ marking rule 230 Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer see DSLAM dimensions 305 disclaimer 385 DNS 100 246 domain name 100 148 265 266 Domain Name System see DNS
205. current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 16 1 1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS See Section 16 2 on page 35 for configuration instruction 16 2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your P 660HWP Dx s DDNS click Advanced gt Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown See Section 16 1 on page 35 for more information P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 135 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Setup
206. d 40000001 ISP lt O No 1 1 Yes gt 40000002 Active lt 0 No 1 l Yes 40000003 ISP s Name ChangeMe 40000004 Encapsulation lt 2 PPPOE 2 3 RFC 1483 4 PPPOA 5 ENET ENCAP gt 40000005 Multiplexing lt 1 LLC based 1 2 VC based 40000006 VPI 0 40000007 VCI d 35 40000008 Service Nam lt Str gt any 40000009 My Login lt Str gt test pga 40000010 My Password lt Str gt 1234 40000011 Single User Account lt 0 No 1 1 Yes gt 40000012 IP Address Assignment lt 0 Static 1 1 Dynamic gt 40000013 IP Address 0 0 0 0 40000014 Remote IP address 0 0 0 0 40000015 Remote IP subnet mask 0 40000016 ISP incoming protocol filter set 1 6 40000017 ISP incoming protocol filter set 2 256 40000018 ISP incoming protocol filter set 3 256 40000019 ISP incoming protocol filter set 4 256 40000020 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 1 256 40000021 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 2 256 40000022 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 3 256 40000023 ISP outgoing protocol filter set 4 256 40000024 ISP PPPOE idle timeout 0 40000025 Route IP lt 0 No 1 1 Yes gt 40000026 Bridge lt 0 No 0 1 Yes gt 40000027 ATM QoS Type O CBR 1 ze UBR
207. d failed POWERLINE Green On The P 660HWP Dx detects another power line Ethernet adapter Blinking The P 660HWP Dx is transmitting data When the device is managing the network the LED does not blink Off The P 660HWP Dx does not detect another power line Ethernet adapter 1 5 Hardware Connections Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware connections P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx 1 5 1 Connecting a POTS Splitter When you use the Full Rate Gdmt ADSL standard you can use a POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence as shown in the following figure Figure 4 Connecting a POTS Splitter Wall Jack 1 Connect the side labeled Phone to your telephone 2 Connect the side labeled Modem or DSL to your P 660HWP Dx 3 Connect the side labeled Line to the telephone wall jack 1 5 2 Telephone Microfilters Telephone voice transmissions take place in the lower frequency range 0 4K Hz while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range above 4K Hz A microfilter acts as a low pass filter for y
208. d port from the drop down list box Port Configuration Type Click Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service Port Number Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen Delete Click Delete to delete the current rule and return to the previous screen 11 7 Example Firewall Rule The following Internet firewall rule example allows a hypothetical MyService connection from the Internet 1 Click Security gt Firewall gt Rules 2 Select WAN to LAN in the Packet Direction field P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 102 Firewall Example Rules Rules Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 3 ov 100 Packet Direction wan to LAN Create a new rule after rule umber o Add ENTERO US Ere a ee E ETE ES Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Rules screen select the index number after that you want to add the rule For example if you select 6 your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 if there is one becomes rule 8 4 Click Add to display the firewall rule configuration screen 5 Inthe Edit Rule scre
209. d standard for implementing VoIP SIP is an application layer control signaling protocol that handles the setting up altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP using the default port number 5060 VoIP H 323 Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP H 323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio data and video conferencing It allows for real time point to point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service H 323 is transported primarily over TCP using the default port number 1720 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard Setup 1 After you enter the admin password to access the web configurator select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply Otherwise click the wizard icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to display the wizard main screen Figure 39 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router or if you need
210. d to provide more efficient communications Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when wireless adapters support it otherwise the AP uses long preamble BES The AP and the wireless adapters MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate IEEE 802 11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802 11b standard This means an IEEE 802 11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802 11g access point and vice versa at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range IEEE 802 11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates The IEEE 802 11g data rate and modulation are as follows Table 139 IEEE 802 11g DATA RATE MBPS MODULATION 1 DBPSK Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed 2 DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying 5 5111 CCK Complementary Code Keying 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients access points and the wired network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs BS Wireless security methods available on the P 660HWP Dx are data encryption wireless client authentication restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the P 660HWP Dx identity The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wirele
211. d0 min fo hrf min Wednesday Vv 0 bro min 0 hdo min Thursday Vv 0 helo min 0 ndo min Friday r o ndo min 0 hi0 min Saturday r1 0 ho min fo ho min Sunday E Jo ho min 0 ndo min Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Content Filter Schedule LABEL DESCRIPTION Schedule Select Active Everyday to Block to make the content filtering active everyday Otherwise select Edit Daily to Block and configure which days of the week or everyday and which time of the day you want the content filtering to be active Active Select this option to allow continuous filtering of websites based on the keywords you Everyday to have chosen Block Edit Daily to Select this option to filter websites according to the day s and time s configured Block Active Select the check box to have the content filtering active on the selected day Start Time Enter the start time when you want the content filtering to take effect in hour minute format End Time Enter the end time when you want the content filtering to stop in hour minute format Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 12 4 Configuring Trusted Computers To exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your P 660HWP Dx click Security gt Content Filter gt Trusted The scr
212. dden node 313 hide SSID 113 host 266 267 host name 265 HTTP 148 158 159 289 hub 35 humidity 305 Hypertext Transfer Protocol see HTTP IANA 101 102 178 IBSS 311 ICMP 161 185 ICMP echo 161 IEEE 802 11g 315 IGMP 102 103 Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 311 initialization vector IV 320 Integrated Services Digital Network see ISDN internal SPTGEN 325 FTP upload example 327 points to remember 326 text file 325 Internet access 36 59 wizard setup 59 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA 101 Internet Control Message Protocol see ICMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol see IGMP IP address 101 148 149 150 305 IP address assignment 83 ENET ENCAP 83 PPPoA or PPPoE 83 RFC 1483 83 IP policy routing IPPR 307 IP pool 107 setup 100 IP protocol type 183 IP spoofing 160 162 ISDN 35 L LAN setup 99 LAN TCP IP 101 LAN to WAN rules 172 LAND 160 161 LEDs 37 local user database 114 and encryption 115 logs 271 alerts 271 configuring 272 descriptions 275 e mail 274 loopback test 296 MAC address 113 MAC address filter 113 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index action 127 MAC address filtering 127 MAC filter 127 maintenance 291 Management Information Base see MIB management server 307 managing the device good habits 37 using FTP See FTP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface maximize bandwidth
213. de edit more details of your WLAN setup Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 4 5 Wireless LAN Advanced Setup To configure advanced wireless settings click the Advanced Setup button in the General screen The screen appears as shown Figure 67 Advanced Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold 4096 0 2432 4096 when G Enhanced Fragmentation Threshold o6 256 2432 4096 when G Enhanced Output Power Maximum Preamble ions v 802 11 Mode Mxea a M Enable 802 11g4 mode Max Frame Burst eso o 1800 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Wireless LAN Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Wireless Advanced Setup RTS CTS Threshold Enter a value between 256 and 2346 Fragmentation Threshold This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent Enter a value between 256 and 2432 Output Power Set the output power of the P 660HWP Dx in this field This control changes the strength of the P 660HWP Dx s antenna gain or transmission power Antenna gain is the increase in coverage Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications If there is a high density of APs within an area decrease the output power of the P 660HWP Dx to reduce interference with other APs The options are Maximum Middle and Minimum Preamble Select Long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support and t
214. depend on the distance from your ISP line quality etc 1 2 Ways to Manage the P 660HWP Dx Use any of the following methods to manage the P 660HWP Dx Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the P 660HWP Dx using a supported web browser Command Line Interface Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore Chapter 21 on page 289 SNMP The device can be monitored by an SNMP manager See the SNMP chapter in this User s Guide SPTGEN SPTGEN is a text configuration file that allows you to configure the device by uploading an SPTGEN file This is especially convenient if you need to configure many devices of the same type TR 069 This is an auto configuration server used to remotely configure your device 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the P 660HWP Dx Do the following things regularly to make the P 660HWP Dx more secure and to manage the P 660HWP Dx more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters e Write down the password and put it in a safe place e Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the P 660HWP Dx to its facto
215. di ulna 259 Es Buen eser Hem M 260 Figure 158 Network Connections My Network Places eeesssessseeesesenen een nn nena ninh nnn nn tnna 261 Figure 159 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ssssss 261 Figure Tol System General SEDES quecccsddusrettenoddst te dax eom d sdL t aa Pe Ug Fa Dd a ic pt S qucd danda 266 Figure TOT oy aed IMME SEN srida i isse ere evt ne epp bc utputa obe reme Geb ape ae Sr eere Edid UR 267 Figure TOZ View LOD e 272 Foue TO LOU C ONOS aaa E E E EEDE 273 Figure TOR Emal Lg EXSNDI iiie ae uec Pei ek Pri LR ECOL VE ANREDE EE ET dase TON DUM EM M pA M UN 275 Figuie TCi Funmware DOSE oie cio d A 289 Figure 166 Firmware Upload In PrGgrGBS Liuius eau netta ka t Eta d gk Nn a E d ga 290 Figure 167 Network Temporarily DISCOlIIBOLGQ suisse iier rtu uito ope tone tap rtm ne teer poop dau pap reda EE Ud 290 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Figures Figure TOS Enor MB associe onam aeq addas aca n tea dat aai sean se uadit qt Eat RR 291 Figure 169 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration iuueuisen ernannt tna nha enhn nh nh n E ERR nata nna 291 Figure 170 Configuration Restore Successful 12 aca ceit cba ark tha eb bh tae SR radar bb bbd ex ER b dade En 292 Figure TT Jemiporatily ENSCODBO Ted vec siicsdaet fpecies en nd aae Fade taa dos ze a duae Hd c RR a a aet aad as 293 Figure 172
216. dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix L Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zy
217. dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 5 1 2 2 LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 5 1 3 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios For Internet access you should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN to LAN applications for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined What method s you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN to LAN application Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application 5 1 3 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols PPPoA RFC 2364 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing is the best combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed The PPP protocol already contains this information
218. dress and Subnet Mask fields Figure 190 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address TCP IP Properties E Bindings Advanced NeBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration 1P Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address v Detect connection to network media TN 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab f you do not know your DNS information select Disable DNS f you know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 191 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration Bindings Advanced NeBlos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Di 5 f Enable DNS Domain Suffix Search Order a Add Remove Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways If you have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted
219. dresses start with 1 1 0 in the first three leftmost bits e Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting which is used to send information to groups of computers There is also a class E It is reserved for future use The following table shows the allowed ranges for the first octet of each class This range determines the number of subnets you can have in a network Table 155 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY OCTET DECIMAL O PRSU Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Class E 11110000 to 11111111 240 to 255 reserved Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 156 Natural Masks CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0
220. ds 227 Table 90 Over Allotment of Bandwidth Example c ccccccccccceceseeseeneeeaeceeceeeeeeeeseeseesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeees 227 Table 91 Media Bandwidth Management Summary sss eene eene 228 Table 92 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup iussisse iter ket dte dett dt d 229 Table 93 Sub Classes ol AF SOIVIDBB iiisedasskissscdaivtosietesstissdi iA kso did rU pact dae Lade cu ek usq qol adt etude 231 Table 94 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration ieeeeessieeeeeeeiieenee nnne nnn tren 232 Table 95 Services and Port NUMDOrS ceccccssccterccssnsedeercansndssertaistgsuns bot dd cte dti tend dd td aec EDR 233 Table 96 Bandwidth Management Monitor lieeaseesiieieeesciiese esee anan nhanh haha a ARR RR RARE ERA RAA 234 Table Sr DaM ONS 3usestoeiitubmieaua i V dec deeem bd ter open iain 236 Table 98 Remote Management WW iuis erit ke d n Rd E ER RASA ES TERR LER HR M dA uid 241 Table 99 Remote Management Telnet 12s cepaa uuu se h apu ERR rA p akER EREA d Rau EP PAR XL M REA RAE EA ERR LEE A Id d 242 Table 100 Remote Management FIP accio eise ridet tert to bare Ebr rd ur E pb rH de Pub br EL eire bd eS beens 243 Table TOT SIE TERES Lisci on deo e Red ar poi o dr a E t e acd 245 Table 102 Remote Management SNMP 1 5 usc epe situe ap PEXa GEPP ERE ee FREE PENNA BEER PH EXN AREE bel dee Rep plea ERES pH aan 246 Table 105 Remote Management DNS 12ienuecccssecuscet irae ee tera taaa eC taque ep Eb tay ae FERE r
221. e 0 255 TCP sessions with the same destination where the P 660HWP Dx starts dropping half open sessions to that destination Sets config edit firewall set set This command sets a name to identify a f name desired name specified set Config edit firewall set set f default permit forward block This command sets whether a packet is dropped or allowed through when it does not meet a rule within the set Config edit firewall set set gt icmp timeout seconds This command sets the time period to allow an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response Config edit firewall set set gt udp idle timeout seconds This command sets how long a UDP connection is allowed to remain inactive before the P 660HWP Dx considers the connection closed Config edit firewall set set f connection timeout seconds This command sets how long P 660HWP Dx waits for a TCP session to be established before dropping the session Config edit firewall set set gt fin wait timeout seconds This command sets how long the P 660HWP Dx leaves a TCP session open after the firewall detects a FIN exchange indicating P 660HWP Dx User s Guide the end of the TCP session Appendix G Firewall Commands Table 168 Firewall Commands continued gt rule lt rule gt permit lt forward block gt FUNCTION COMMAND DESCR
222. e IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection Recovery Interval When the P 660HWP Dx is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the P 660HWP Dx to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 25 WAN Backup Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout Type the number of seconds 3 recommended for your P 660HWP Dx to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request The WAN connection is considered down after the P 660HWP Dx times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the P 660HWP Dx cannot connect to the Internet Active Traffic Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx use traffic redirect if the normal Redirect WAN connection goes down Note If you activate traffic redirect you must configure at least one Check WAN IP Address Metric This field sets this route s
223. e not recommended Password User Password If you log in with the user password you can only view the P 660HWP Dx status The default user password is user New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the P 660HWP Dx Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Admin If you log in with the admin password you can configure the advanced features as Password well as the wizard setup on the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 107 System General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Old Password Type the default admin password 1234 or the existing password you use to access the system for configuring advanced features New Password Type your new system password up to 30 characters Note that as you type a password the screen displays a for each character you type After you change the password use the new password to access the P 660HWP Dx Retype to Type the new password again for confirmation Confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 2 Time Setting To change your P 660HWP Dx s time and date click Maintenance gt System gt Time Setting The screen app
224. e range of P 660HWP Dx features If you cannot access the Internet open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Bandwidth Management Wizard This chapter shows you how to configure basic bandwidth management using the wizard screens 4 1 Introduction Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the P 660HWP Dx s WAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to service bandwidth requirements This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION WWW The World Wide Web WWW is an Internet system to distribute graphical hyper linked information based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP a client server protocol for the World Wide Web The Web is not synonymous with the Internet rather it is just one service on the Internet Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups The Web is accessed through use of a browser FTP File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files including large files that
225. e IP address Use NAT to convert your public IP address es to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network Port Forwarding If you have a server mail or web server for example on your network you can use this feature to let people access it from the Internet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the P 660HWP Dx assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS Domain Name System support you can use a fixed URL www zyxel com for example with a dynamic IP address You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider HomePlugAV The HomePlug AV standard specifies how network devices communicate using standard electrical wiring It supports a data transfer rate of up to 200Mbps Data is encrypted using 128 bit AES Link Encryption HomePlug AV compatible devices co exist with HomePlug 1 0 devices but do not detect each other The range of a HomePlug AV network is 300 meters 984 feet HomePlug AV is compatible with all OSs IP Multicast IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers The P 660HWP Dx supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol used to join multicast groups see RFC 2236 IP Alias IP alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface with t
226. e IP address pool Remote DHCP Server If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned The P 660HWP Dx passes a DNS Domain Name System server IP by DHCP Server address to the DHCP clients Primary DNS Server These fields are not available when you set DHCP to Relay Secondary DNS Server Enter the IP address es of the DNS server s The DNS server s are passed to the DHCP clients along with their IP address es and subnet mask s If both fields are left as 0 0 0 0 the P 660HWP Dx acts as a DNS proxy and forwards the DHCP client s DNS query to the DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 5 LAN Client List This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC Media Access Control address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To change your P 660HWP Dx s static DHCP settings click Network gt LAN gt Client List The screen appears as shown P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup Figure 58 LAN Client List Client Lis
227. e Internet Connection screen The screen appears as shown P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 46 Advanced Internet Connection Setup RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction None RIP Version viz Multicast None ATM Qos ATM QoS Type CBR v Peak Cell Rate a cell sec Sustain Cell Rate o cell sec Maximum Burst Size fo cell Zero Configuration No PPPoE Passthrough No v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Internet Connection Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The P 660HWP Dx supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR nRT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time or VBR RT Variable Bit Rate Real Time for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the P
228. e Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLIVE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution 7 8 QoS Screen
229. e command line will display the Field Identification Number Figure 185 on page 36 shown next is an example of what the P 660HWP Dx displays if you enter a value other than 0 or 1 in the Input column of Field Identification Number 1000000 refer to Figure 184 on page 35 Figure 185 Invalid Parameter Entered Command Line Example field value is not legal error 1 ROM t is not saved error Line ID 10000000 reboot to get the original configuration Bootbase Version V2 02 2 22 2001 13 33 11 RAM Size 8192 Kbytes FLASH Intel 8M 2 The P 660HWP Dx will display the following if you enter parameter s that are valid Figure 186 Valid Parameter Entered Command Line Example Please wait for the system to write SPT text file ROM t Bootbase Version V2 02 2 22 2001 13 33 11 RAM Size 8192 Kbytes FLASH Intel 8M 2 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example 1 Launch your FTP application 2 Enter bin The command bin sets the transfer mode to binary 3 Get rom t file The command get transfers files from the P 660HWP Dx to your computer The name rom t is the configuration filename on the P 660HWP Dx 4 Edit the rom t file using a text editor do not use a word processor You must leave this FTP screen to edit P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Figure 187 Internal SPTGEN FTP Download Example c N tp 192 168 1 1 220 PPP FTP versi
230. e how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BES Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The P 660HWP Dx may be referred to as the P 660HWP Dx the device or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Document
231. e network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 154 on page 35 available for subnetting The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 167 Class B Subnet Planning Bs BORROWED HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 4 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8 8190 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting Table 167 Class B Subnet Planning continued Bs BORROWED HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 1 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Command Interpreter The following describes how to use the command interpreter You can telnet to access the CLI Command Line Interface on the P 660HWP Dx See the included disk or zyxel com for more detailed information on these commands
232. e rules are listed P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Ei Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 98 Firewall Rules Rules ofl o RI Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 3 Packet Direction Create a new rule after rule number 10095 WAN to LAN bas Ma Move the rule tofo Move ct BST Rr RITTER UR ERR RS IP 1 M any any NetBIOS TCP UDP 137 139 445 7 Permit No No g mi bN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Firewall Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use This read only bar shows how much of the P 660HWP Dx s memory for recording firewall rules it is currently using When you are using 80 or less of the storage space the bar is green When the amount of space used is over 80 the bar is red Packet Direction Use the drop down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules Create a new rule after rule number Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number For example if you select 6 your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 if there is one becomes rule 8 The following read only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction The firewall rules that you configure summarized below ta
233. e service the proxy server remembers things about your original request like the port number and source and destination addresses This remembering is called saving the state When the outside system responds to your request the firewall compares the received packets with the saved state to determine if they P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls are allowed in The P 660HWP Dx uses stateful packet inspection to protect the private LAN from hackers and vandals on the Internet By default the P 660HWP Dx s stateful inspection allows all communications to the Internet that originate from the LAN and blocks all traffic to the LAN that originates from the Internet In summary stateful inspection Allows all sessions originating from the LAN local network to the WAN Internet Denies all sessions originating from the WAN to the LAN Figure 96 Stateful Inspection quvvapuavavann 2a gt navanannenens eanana saan a pananasn PR P y n odd xx ie WAN i aS Retu rn traffic for User A s Teln gt session is permitted ri Protected UserA initiates a Telnet session H is LAN i 1 Other Telnet traffic is blocked i d F Fi f E 3 H a E D 1 E LEN E j H D t mt i 2 naa Ss rs 3 71 t t hy at aa The previous figure shows the P 660HWP Dx s default firewall rules in action as well as demonst
234. e table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets Table 85 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management Example TRAFFIC TYPE FROM SUBNET A FROM SUBNET B VolP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps FTP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps E mail 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Video 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 15 5 Scheduler The scheduler divides up an interface s bandwidth among the bandwidth classes The P 660HWP Dx has two types of scheduler fairness based and priority based 15 5 1 Priority based Scheduler With the priority based scheduler the P 660HWP Dx forwards traffic from bandwidth classes according to the priorities that you assign to the bandwidth classes The larger a bandwidth class s priority number is the higher the priority Assign real time applications like those using audio or video a higher priority number to provide smoother operation P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 15 5 2 Fairness based Scheduler The P 660HWP Dx divides bandwidth equally among bandwidth classes when using the fairness based scheduler thus preventing one bandwidth class from using all of the interface s bandwidth 15 6 Maximize Bandwidth Usage The maximize bandwidth usage option see Figure 130 on page 40 allows the P 660HWP Dx to divide up any available bandwidth on the interface including unallocated bandwidth and any allocated bandwidth that a class is not u
235. e va E se Ou bu as titu tu vent CI etu ipu 127 Figure 76 Wireless LAN QOS Me 131 Figure 77 Application Priority Configuration sues cerca ei bebo xin Ek RO EG i d bt pna E tti RR tonne 132 Figure T9 Exp Your DISDNOEK uaiscnepditbrteriqebs tan Md txe M S DEED TU ERN P DU pA UM PH MN NE ERE MEHR 135 Figure 79 Powering MeORK Scene idi osse en a dacfe m as ea od t a dle Da e Up RR ERR 136 Figure 80 Two Private Powerline Networks on One Circuit sssssee me 137 Figure 81 Network Powerline gt Local SQUING iaieeasscseeceteserot ttn torret pe reta Spe pec dnas inea 138 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 Network gt Powerline gt Remote Setting cene nnne enn nnne tnn na nnne nae 139 Figure 83 Network gt Powerline gt COEBIUBE 2isscea cscskeek cta tapa aeuo RA pha ERE R AE RE REA rk2E EE EE TERuE EU REA FEERE taikai d 140 Figure 84 How a NI qM 144 Figure 85 NAT Application VIR TP AUS diseinatua a rea Erat Ee ERE br o a Rada doa 145 zc dog MI Mr 147 Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT EXarmple ssmcicsssiscsssccinsesiacen rebat bo eene teta ERR enki Ebro urbi Paid aep x see 149 Figure 09 NAT Forn eg DET T TT 150 Figure 99 Poit Forwarding Rule Seip seressenbansikede innan UNSO RNANA ri PE Ea Os 151 Figure 90 Address Mapping PUBS 44 2 5 ccn Dr o desit doc ado ri ados ce s ceni do e donc aed 152 Figure 91 Edit Address Mapping BUB 1 5 ie
236. e web site is in a trusted domain oo S When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn t select the Block Matched Web Site check box the system forwards the web content Waiting content filter server timeout The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period DNS resolving failed The P 660HWP Dx cannot get the IP address of the external content filtering via DNS query Creating socket failed The P 660HWP Dx cannot issue a query because TCP IP socket creation failed port port number Connecting to content filter server fail The connection to the external content filtering server failed License key is invalid The external content filtering license key is invalid P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 121 Attack Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION attack TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF attack attack ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 land TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF U The firewall detected a TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF land attack land ICMP type d code d The firewall detected an ICMP land attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 ip spoofing WAN TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF
237. eak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less than the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec Maximum Burst Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be Size sent at the peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 21 Advanced Internet Connection Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Zero This feature is not applicable available when you configure the P 560HWP Dx to Configuration use a static WAN IP address or in bridge mode Select Yes to set the P 560HWP Dx to automatically detect the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and make the necessary configuration changes Select No to disable this feature You must manually configure the P 660HWP Dx for Internet access PPPoE This feature is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation Passthrough In addition to the P 660HWP Dx s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the P 660HWP Dx Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through i
238. ears as shown Use this screen to configure the P 660HWP Dx s time based on your local time zone Figure 161 System Time Setting Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 00 36 06 Current Date 2000 01 01 Time and Date Setup C Manual New Time hh mm ss fo o s New Date yyyy mm dd 300 vit vk Get from Time Server Time Protocol Daytime RFC 867 7 Time Server Address 0 0 0 0 Time Zone Setup Time Zone com Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London z IV Enable Daylight Savings Start Date First gt Sunday of venuerv 2000 01 02 at 0 o clock End Date First Sunday 7 of January 2000 01 02 at Io o clock Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 System The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 108 System Time Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and Date Current Time This field displays the time of your P 660HWP Dx Each time you reload this page the P 660HWP Dx synchronizes the time with the time server Current Date This field displays the date of your P 560HWP Dx Each time you reload this page the P 560HWP Dx synchronizes the date with the time server Time and Date Setup Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually If you configure a new time and date Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time the new time and date you e
239. ed Username The router used extended authentication to authenticate the Username listed username XAUTH fail Username The router was not able to use extended authentication to Username authenticate the listed username Rule d Phase 1 negotiation mode mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 negotiation mode did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 encryption algorithm mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 authentication algorithm mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 authentication algorithm did not match between the router and the peer P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 123 IKE Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Rule d Phase 1 The listed rule s IKE phase 1 authentication method did not authentication method match between the router and the peer mismatch Rule d Phase 1 key group The listed rule s IKE phase 1 key group did not match mismatch between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 protocol The listed rule s IKE phase 2 protocol did not match between mismatch the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 encryption The listed rule s IKE phase 2 encryption algorithm did not algorithm mismatch match between the router and the peer R
240. ed the peer s Local Address as the router s Remote Address This information conflicted with static rule d thus the connection is not allowed Phase 1 ID type mismatch This router s Peer ID Type is different from the peer IPSec router s Local ID Type Phase 1 ID content mismatch This router s Peer ID Content is different from the peer IPSec router s Local ID Content No known phase 1 ID type found The router could not find a known phase 1 ID in the connection attempt ID type mismatch Local Peer Local ID type Peer ID type The phase 1 ID types do not match ID content mismatch The phase 1 ID contents do not match Configured Peer ID Content Configured Peer ID Content The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the configured Peer ID Content is displayed Incoming ID Content XIncoming Peer ID Content The phase 1 ID contents do not match and the incoming packet s ID content is displayed Unsupported local ID Type td The phase 1 ID type is not supported by the router Build Phase 1 ID The router has started to build the phase 1 ID Adjust TCP MSS to d The router automatically changed the TCP Maximum Segment Size value after establishing a tunnel Rule d input idle time The tunnel for the listed rule was dropped because there was out disconnect no inbound traffic within the idle timeout period XAUTH succe
241. ed for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm 30 0 2 0 4 22 0 1 adlie 30 0 2 0 M A P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies Ad hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent Ad hoc WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters A B C Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other they can set up an independent network which is commonly referred to as an ad hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set IBSS The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad hoc wireless LAN Figure 178 Peer to Peer Communication in an Ad hoc Network _ _ A s rape i BSS A Basic Service Set BSS exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point AP Intra BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS When Intra BSS is enabled wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other When Intra BSS is disabled wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix B Wireless LANs ESS Figure 179 Basic
242. een appears as shown Figure 111 Content Filter Trusted Trusted User IP Range From IP address To IP address Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Content Filter Trusted LABEL DESCRIPTION Trusted User IP Range From Type the IP address of a computer or the beginning IP address of a specific range of computers on the LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering To Type the ending IP address of a specific range of users on your LAN that you want to exclude from content filtering Leave this field blank if you want to exclude an individual computer Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 12 Content Filtering P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Certificates This chapter gives background information about public key certificates and explains how to use them 13 1 Certificates Overview The P 660HWP Dx can use certificates also called digital IDs to authenticate users Certificates are based on public private key pairs A certificate contains the certificate owner s identity and public key Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication A Certification Authority CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner There
243. eh Rat RH ER HL SS o 171 Wa enisi ret m Um Umm 171 11 24 1 LAN EWAN RUES iere orem birra ctt epu te bacs na beet Po Fond PME Ee kd ERU 172 D sercoc Me 172 To Goel Frowal Fo A e eee 172 11 6 Firewall Rules SUMME dM 173 11 6 1 Contiguring Firewall RUSS iuesescedcaadeeu a ba ette ssnhacuiin EP PA eek kn dp paradas 175 115 2 Customized SorviIDBS iaisssneiiattitesqiten acdsee 178 11 6 3 Configuring a Customized Serie uursipordenn o diac os e Dua o d as RR GA 178 11 7 Example Frewall Rule e S S aa aa 179 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents 1S PRS Sere PETIT tees 183 TU N OND ETTE T E E I kaon deci Ka peda apd Gena nan nee ka pti I ET IE 185 TIAE DOS TREGShDIUS agers cxsecatirs contcdursracriginenscacedins Ob VI DIE asia giant a A AAE SPD E Ebv EPI HERES 186 T1101 Threshold SOS aod pt p nosti Er OR d tp pr o ed oai e ee as 186 JEMEN br c T S 187 11 10 3 Configuring Firewall Thresholds uiua sese turpe tteI ERR enas 187 Chapter 12 Content Filferilit essinxxise bit ba Vra zie kk e nsdsn naano ANRRXRUlREx ORAS gGu SRM ERR PR UR UU ARK CR IN cR SRM RDE SO 191 12 1 Content Filtering OVODPVIW Lieu ripa a enr Kata EX Rn RE EN BAR RA NN a EN RR KE 191 12 2 Configuring Keyword BIOGKING iauuucicuicecieeeecennt tierra teo oc tuae tour tma e ARa dau E 191 123 Comigunng Wo SCEUS e 9S 192 12 4 Configuring Trusted Computas astuces tseimirtr eder beban GRE EE Fa e ppa iinn 193 Chapter 1
244. el P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 Remote Management SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION SNMP Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service SNMP Configuration Get Community Enter the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests Set Community Enter the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The default is public and allows all requests TrapCommunity Type the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The default is public and allows all requests TrapDestination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to
245. ell known security deficiencies When you upgrade to the latest versions you get the latest patches and fixes If you use chat rooms or IRC sessions be careful with any information you reveal to strangers If your system starts exhibiting odd behavior contact your ISP Some hackers will set off hacks that cause your system to slowly become unstable or unusable P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls Always shred confidential information particularly about your computer before throwing it away Some hackers dig through the trash of companies or individuals for information that might help them in an attack 10 7 Packet Filtering Vs Firewall Below are some comparisons between the P 660HWP Dx s filtering and firewall functions 10 7 1 Packet Filtering The router filters packets as they pass through the router s interface according to the filter rules you designed Packet filtering is a powerful tool yet can be complex to configure and maintain especially if you need a chain of rules to filter a service Packet filtering only checks the header portion of an IP packet 10 7 1 1 When To Use Filtering To block allow LAN packets by their MAC addresses To block allow special IP packets which are neither TCP nor UDP nor ICMP packets To block allow both inbound WAN to LAN and outbound LAN to WAN traffic between the specific inside host network A and outside host network B If the filter
246. elow This is the rule index number read only Active Click this check box to enable the rule Service Name This is a service s name Start Port This is the first port number that identifies a service End Port This is the last port number that identifies a service Server IP This is the server s IP address Address Modify Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 9 6 1 Port Forwarding Rule Edit To edit a port forwarding rule click the rule s edit icon Bf in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen shown next P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 89 Port Forwarding Rule Setup Rule Setup Iv Active Service Name Vw Start Port so End Port eo Server IP Address Roi 012 Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 52 Port Forwarding Rule Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Click this check box to enable the rule Service Name Enter a name to identify this port forwarding rule Start Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one po
247. ement If it is disabled you might consider activating it If it is enabled you might consider changing the allocations 23 4 Powerline Issues e cannot start my powerline device 1 Check your power supply Powerline adapters operate from the power supplied by your home wiring and cannot operate without a working power supply 2 Make sure that you are using the power cable included with your P 660HWP Dx to attach your P 660HWP Dx to the power supply Standard plugs do not have a powerline network capability 3 Remove the P 660HWP Dx s plug from the outlet Then plug an electrical device that you know works into the same power outlet This checks the status of the power outlet 4 Plug a second HomePlug AV adapter into an outlet adjacent to your P 660HWP Dx and see if the Link amp LED lights up This checks whether the P 660HWP Dx can detect the powerline adapters on your electrical circuit e cannot access my powerline network Make sure that the devices on your network are all on the same electrical wire 2 Check also that the network does not extend past the power meter Powerline signals cannot pass this 3 Make sure that all the powerline adapters you are using are HomePlug AV compliant The P 660HWP Dx does NOT recognize earlier versions of HomePlug powerline adapters such as HomePlug 1 0 or 1 0 1 Although they can coexist on the same network 4 Make sure that the network password is the same o
248. en click the Edit Customized Services link to open the Customized Service screen 6 Click an index number to display the Customized Services Config screen and configure the screen as follows and click Apply Figure 103 Edit Custom Port Example Config Service Name MyService Service Type TEPP 7 Port Configuration Type single Port Range Port Number From 123 To 123 Back Apply Cancel Delete 7 Select Any in the Destination Address box and then click Delete 8 Configure the destination address screen as follows and click Add P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Figure 104 Firewall Example Edit Rule Destination Address Edit Rule 1 M Active Action for Matched Packets Permit Source Address Address Type Any Address z Start IP boso Address End IP ooo 0 Address Subnet Mask 0 1 0 Destination Address Address Type Range Address x Start IP Roo 030 Address ee End IP fio oo1s Address 200013 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Add gt gt Edit Source Address List Any Destination Address List 10 0 0 10 10 0 0 15 9 Use the Add gt gt and Remove buttons between Available Services and Selected Services list boxes to configure it as follows Click Apply when you are done Custom services show up with an before their names in the Services list box and the Rules list box P 660
249. enter the default admin password 1234 to configure the wizards and the advanced features 2 Click Login to proceed to a screen asking you to change your password or click Cancel to revert to the default password 3 Ifyou entered the admin password it is highly recommended you change the default admin password Enter a new password between 1 and 30 characters retype it to confirm and click Apply Alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ES If you do not change the password at least once the following screen appears every time you log in with the admin password Figure 10 Change Password at Login Use this screen to change the password Your router is currently using the default password To protect your network from unauthorized users we anggan you change your password at this time se select a new password that will be easy to remember yet difficult for 4 Select Go to Wizard setup and click Apply to display the wizard main screen Otherwise select Go to Advanced setup and click Apply to display the Status screen Figure 11 Select a Mode Please select Wizard or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings We si e this mod setting up your The management session automatically times out when the time
250. ephone or through an HTTPS connection 13 4 Configuration Summary This section summarizes how to manage certificates on the P 660HWP Dx Figure 114 Certificate Configuration Overview My Certificates Trusted CAs Directory Servers Use the My Certificate screens to generate and export self signed certificates or certification requests and import the P 660HWP Dx s CA signed certificates Use the Trusted CA screens to save the certificates of trusted CAs to the P 660HWP Dx You an also export the certificates to a computer Use the Trusted Remote Hosts screens to import self signed certificates from trusted remote hosts Use the Directory Servers screen to configure a list of addresses of directory servers that contain lists of valid and revoked certificates P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates 13 5 My Certificates Click Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen This is the P 660HWP Dx s summary list of certificates and certification requests Certificates display in black and certification requests display in gray Figure 115 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates My Certificates My Certificates PKI Storage Space in Use 3 Q9 10095 Factory Default Certificate Name auto generated self signed cert The factory default certificate is common to all Prestige models Click Replace to create a certificate using y
251. er 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user s identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key PMK key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system using the pair wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients Figure 182 WPA 2 with RADIUS Application Example SES did a NIC NR brem J m x Ne WPA 2 PSK Application Example A WPA 2 PSK application looks as follows 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients The Pre Shared Key PSK must consist of between 8 and 63 English keyboard characters or 64 hexadecimal characters including spaces and symbols 2 The AP checks each wireless client s password and only allows it to join the network if the password matches 3 The AP and wireless clients use the pre shared key to generate a common PMK Pairwise Master Key P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them Figure 183 WPA 2 PSK Authentication A Dyo Internet JJ Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method key management protocol type
252. er 13 Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage This bar displays the percentage of the P 560HWP Dx s PKI storage space that is Space in Use currently in use When the storage space is almost full you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates Issuer My Default This field displays identifying information about the default self signed certificate Self signed on the P 660HWP Dx that the P 660HWP Dx uses to sign the trusted remote host Certificate certificates This field displays the certificate index number The certificates are listed in alphabetical order Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate
253. er adaptor or cord for your device e Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord e Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution e If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one e Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device e Please use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Antenna Warning This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna s Only use the included antenna s If you wall mount your device make sure that no electrical lines gas or water pipes will be damaged This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Safety Warnings P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Safety Warnings P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview TARE TORY ee 33 Irtroducin
254. er computer network to connect to the P 660HWP Dx refer to the Quick Start Guide 3 Launch your web browser 4 Type http 192 168 1 1 as the URL P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 5 A window displays as shown Figure 8 Password Screen P 660HWP D1 Welcome to your router Configuration Interface Enter your password and press enter or click Login 2 2 1 User Access 1 For user access enter the default user password user to view the status only The following window will appear Figure 9 User status screen Refresh Interval f None z Apply Host Name System Uptime 0 02 11 Model Number P 660HWP D1 Current Date Time 01 01 2000 00 05 30 MAC Address 00 13 49 00 00 01 System Mode Routing Bridging ZyNOS Firmware Version V3 40 APD 0 b1_20070128 CPU Usage La 2 60 01 29 2007 z G gt Memory Usage a 28 DSL Firmware Version TI AR7 07 00 04 00 WAN Information E DSL Mode NORMAL B B o 0 0 00 roe LL IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VPI VCI 8 35 VAN IR OFmISUOn DSL Down 0 kbps 0 kbps IP Address 192 168 1 1 LAN 1 Up 100M Full Duplex IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Laid Doin WLAN Information LAN 3 Down SSID ZyXEL Channel 6 Lis Dos Security Disabled WLAN Active 125M G Powerline Active 0 Mbps 0 Mbps 2 2 2 Administrator Access 1 Foradministrator access
255. er of existing half open sessions rises above this number the P 660HWP Dx deletes half open sessions as required to accommodate new connection requests Do not set Maximum Incomplete High to lower than the current Maximum Incomplete Low number 100 existing half open sessions The above values causes the P 660HWP Dx to start deleting half open sessions when the number of existing half open sessions rises above 100 and to stop deleting half open sessions with the number of existing half open sessions drops below 80 TCP Maximum Incomplete This is the number of existing half open TCP sessions with the same destination host IP address that causes the firewall to start dropping half open sessions to that same destination host IP address Enter a number between 1 and 256 As a general rule you should choose a smaller number for a smaller network a slower system or limited bandwidth 10 existing half open TCP sessions Action taken when the TCP Maximum Incomplete threshold is reached Delete the oldest half open session when new connection request comes Select this radio button to clear the oldest half open session when a new connection request comes Deny new connection request for Select this radio button and specify for how long the P 660HWP Dx should block new connection requests when TCP Maximum Incomplete is reached Enter the length of blocking time in minutes between 1 and 256 App
256. erface P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 6 Later an inbound packet reaches the interface This packet is part of the connection previously established with the outbound packet The inbound packet is evaluated against the inbound access list and is permitted because of the temporary access list entry previously created 7 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule and the connection s state table entry is updated as necessary Based on the updated state information the inbound extended access list temporary entries might be modified in order to permit only packets that are valid for the current state of the connection 8 Any additional inbound or outbound packets that belong to the connection are inspected to update the state table entry and to modify the temporary inbound access list entries as required and are forwarded through the interface 9 When the connection terminates or times out the connection s state table entry is deleted and the connection s temporary inbound access list entries are deleted 10 5 2 Stateful Inspection and the P 660HWP Dx Additional rules may be defined to extend or override the default rules For example a rule may be created which will Block all traffic of a certain type such as IRC Internet Relay Chat from the LAN to the Internet Allow certain types of traffic from the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN Allow access to a Web server to everyone but competitors
257. ernet Wireless Access uussnssssnnsnrnnennnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 59 ener m 59 3 2 Internet Wireless Access Wizard Setup ssssssssssessseeeneeneeennene 59 254 POMS DOIOEDON 2 io cn ERU SERO Ex n DRE tp ED IRR Rd Da M IMP aM oed 61 xc Monual COMIQUIALION er 62 2 0 Wireless Connecgcm Wizard Sell 415 cocci tnra Cone b rh d Y LE PP IUUE CER rr eia bn dia EIER A TRULY EA uU 67 3 3 1 Manually assign a WPA PSK KOy auus ci prieterte toad EEE RUE EFE n ENE ND UEBER DEAE RR PUUEUA 70 3 3 2 Manually assign WEP Key ridere rn eal ste aa reddi oti a PES A ndr d OO PN 70 Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard llueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeieeeeseeeeeeeeene nnne n nennen nnn nnn 73 zer cq ETE EU UE m T3 4 2 Predefined Media Bandwidth Management Services ssssseeeene 73 4 3 Bandwidth Management Wizard Setup ccceseeesecceeceeeeeeeeesesesenseesesesnsaeseeesenaeeeeeesanee 74 xc EHE ril eM 79 Chapter 5 MA Ell A A MU T EE E E NER 81 2 1 VAN ONON aaan E NR 81 SLI Encapsulation me nnn Er E ENE vier i a AEE AE 81 Nd i m mE 82 5 1 3 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios sero rtr ra het naenin n korea iak 82 m Ru E uLue m 83 S LS IP Address PSION MT 83 5 16 Nailed Up Connection PPP 1uuscaciiisceiciie betur iiir trt td Meet dti de bcd x
258. ers and search domain Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network Hostname Primary DNS Secondary DNS Tertiary DNS DNS Search Path Active Profile Common modified 5 Click the Devices tab 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes The following screen displays Click Yes to save the changes in all screens Figure 206 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration Activate vS redhat config network You have made some changes in your configuration To activate the network device ethO the changes have to be saved Do you want to continue XNo Yes Eu 7 After the network card restart process is complete make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer locate the ifconfig eth0 configuration file where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card Open the configuration file with any plain text editor f you have a dynamic IP address enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO field The following figure shows an example P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 207 Red Hat 9 0 Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO EVICE eth0 BOOT yes OOT PROTO d
259. ers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT 9 1 2 What NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping see Table 48 on page 38 NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your P 660HWP Dx filters out all incoming inquiries
260. es in a managed device the P 660HWP Dx An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 17 6 1 Supported MIBs The P 660HWP Dx supports MIB II that is defined in RFC 1213 and RFC 1215
261. es of the computer and the P 660HWP Dx are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the P 660HWP Dx and access the Internet The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a P 660HWP Dx is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the P 660HWP Dx are not in the same subnet Figure 54 An xample y lt Bv m TN T E3 EE Internet 192 168 10 1 J i N nace Internet 192 168 10 1 192 168 1 1 The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx s IP address P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup You must enable NAT SUA to use the Any IP feature on the P 660HWP Dx 6 2 4 1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the P 660HWP Dx to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its specified destination The following li
262. espond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the P 660HWP Dx by probing for unused ports If you select this option the P 660HWP Dx will not respond to port request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the P 660HWP Dx unseen By default this option is not selected and the P 660HWP Dx will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the P 660HWP Dx s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the P 660HWP Dx reacts based on the corresponding firewall policy to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet or an ICMP port unreachable packet for a blocked UDP packets or just drop the packets without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 9 TR 069 TR 069 is a DSL Forum standard that defines how CPE Customer Premise Equipment for example
263. et information from the time server WAN interface gets IP s A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP PPPoE PPTP or dial up server DHCP client IP expired A DHCP client s IP address has expired DHCP server assigns s The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client Successful W EB login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface WEB login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface Successful T ELN ET login Someone has logged on to the router via telnet TELNET login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet Successful FTP login Someone has logged on to the router via ftp FTP login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp NAT Session Tab le is Full The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 111 System Maintenance Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Starting Connectivity Starting Connectivity Monitor Monitor Time initialized by Daytime The router got the time and date from the Daytime server Server Time initialized by Time The router got the time and date from the time server server Time initialized by NTP The router got the time and date from the NTP ser
264. ettings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings btain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click Close OK in Windows 2000 NT to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10 Close the Network Connections window Network and Dial up Connections in Windows 2000 NT 11 Turn on your P 660HWP Dx and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 199 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer Kp Apple System Profiler E Calculator Chooser ADSL Control and Status Control Panels Appearance J Favorites Apple Menu Options 2 Key Caps AppleTalk Network Browser ColorSync Recent Applicatio
265. eturn to the previously saved settings 18 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP 18 3 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 146 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Pro 2x To add or remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components M G Address Book Communications 5 5 MB C RF Desktop Themes 0 0 MB M ii Games 10 1 MB L1 E Multilanguage Support 0 0 MB x Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply 3 Inthe Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 147 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components To install a component select the check box next t
266. etween networks or subnets connected to the LAN interface LAN to WAN By default the P 660HWP Dx s stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions WAN to LAN WAN to WAN Router This prevents computers on the WAN from using the P 660HWP Dx as a gateway to communicate with other computers on the WAN and or managing the P 660HWP Dx You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration LES If you configure firewall rules without a good understanding of how they work you might inadvertently introduce security risks to the firewall and to the protected network Make sure you test your rules after you configure them For example you may create rules to Block certain types of traffic such as IRC Internet Relay Chat from the LAN to the Internet Allow certain types of traffic such as Lotus Notes database synchronization from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN Allow everyone except your competitors to access a Web server Restrict use of certain protocols such as Telnet to authorized users on the LAN These custom rules work by comparing the Source IP address Destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator Your customized rules take precedence and override the P 660HWP Dx s default r
267. event an attacker from capturing data packets altering them and resending them The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC If they do not match it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism MIC with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network The encryption mechanisms used for WPA 2 and WPA 2 PSK are the same The only difference between the two is that WPA 2 PSK uses a simple common password instead of user specific credentials The common password approach makes WPA 2 PSK susceptible to brute force password guessing attacks but it s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent single alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys a weakness of WEP User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802 1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four CCMP 4 way handshake and shortens the time required to connect to a network Other WPA2 authentication features that
268. eway 0 0 0 0 120108006 IP Static Route set 8 Metric 0 120108007 IP Static Route set 8 Private lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Table 148 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup Menu 15 SUA Server Setup FIN FN PVA INPUT 150000001 SUA Server IP address for default 0 0 0 0 port 150000002 SUA Server 2 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000003 SUA Server 2 Protocol lt 0 Al11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 148 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup continued 150000004 SUA Server 2 Port Start 0 150000005 SUA Server 2 Port End 0 150000006 SUA Server 2 Local IP address 0 150000007 SUA Server 3 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000008 SUA Server 3 Protocol X0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 50000009 SUA Server 3 Port Start 0 50000010 SUA Server 3 Port End 0 50000011 SUA Server 3 Local IP address 0 150000012 SUA Server 4 Active 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000013 SUA Server 4 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000014 SUA Server 4 Port Start 0 150000015 SUA Server 4 Port End 0 150000016 SUA Server 4 Local IP address 0 150000017 SUA Server 5 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000018 SUA Server 5 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000019 SUA Server 5 P
269. f Wireless LAN active Uncheck this option if you like do deactivate your wireless network Enable OTIST Check here to set up a ZyAIR client adapter that supports OTIST Note Please type in a unique setup key This key acts like a password to ensure only those wireless LAN devices you authorize are configured by OTIST This key should not be the same as the router password the password you use to log in to your ISP You will need to remember this key to setup new devices via OTIST ET ES E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to turn on the wireless LAN Enable OTIST Select the check box to enable OTIST if you want to transfer your P 660HWP Dx s SSID and WPA PSK security settings to wireless clients that support OTIST and are within transmission range You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless client at the same time The process takes three minutes to complete Note Enable OTIST only if your wireless clients support WPA and OTIST Setup Key Type an OTIST Setup Key of up to eight English keyboard characters in length Be sure to use the same OTIST Setup Key on the P 660HWP Dx and wireless clients Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving 3 Configure your wi
270. firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 Table 122 IPSec Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Discard REPLAY packet The router received and discarded a packet with an incorrect sequence number Inbound packet authentication failed The router received a packet that has been altered A third party may have altered or tampered with the packet Receive IPSec packet but no corresponding tunnel exists The router dropped an inbound packet for which SPI could not find a corresponding phase 2 SA P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 122 IPSec Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Rule lt d gt idle time out disconnect The router dropped a connection that had outbound traffic and no inbound traffic for a certain time period You can use the ipsec timer chk_conn Cl command to set the time period The default value is 2 minutes WAN IP changed to lt IP gt The router dropped all connections with the MyIP configured as 0 0 0 0 when the WAN IP address changed Table 123 IKE Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Active connection allowed exceeded The IKE process for a new connection failed because the limit of simultaneous phase 2 SAs has been reached Start Phase 2 Quick Mode Phase 2 Quick Mode has started Verifying Remote ID failed The connecti
271. formation exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP and LEAP Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802 1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication By using EAP to interact with an EAP compatible RADIUS server an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP s that supports IEEE 802 1x P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs For EAP TLS authentication type you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate s from a certificate authority CA A certificate also called digital IDs can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner EAP MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 5 MDS authentication is the simplest one way authentication method The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information Password is not sent in plain text However
272. g messages are sent Day for Sending Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs Log Time for Enter the time of the day in 24 hour format for example 23 00 equals 11 00 pm to Sending Log send the logs Clear log after sending mail Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the P 660HWP Dx sends an E mail of the logs Syslog Logging The P 660HWP Dx sends a log to an external syslog server Active Click Active to enable syslog logging Syslog Server IP Address Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server Refer to the syslog server manual for more information Active Log and Alert Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record Send Immediate Alert Select log categories for which you want the P 660HWP Dx to send E mail alerts immediately Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 20 3 1 Example E mail Log An End of Log message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent The following is an example of a log sent by e mail You may edit the subject title The date format here is
273. g tie P DEOHVEP OR a1iscorccstin net GEO KHROA GUT HR EORR LIRA IAS SA RU CURA PI ARN ROSA 35 introducing the Web Configurator eMe 43 MZ Sais daa E P E A VE LEES E AEE P E E O T A ARM E A 57 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access 1 c ccccsessecceeeeeseeeeeeeseseeceeeesneecceeeeneneaeeenenseaes 59 Bandwidth Management WiZeatrd securis remet cenas sicca etra crt besser eta sacr derer nda 73 is AE T E E E E E E E EEA E EE 79 WAN SOUD m 81 Bee Leontii attese obe nniated vrata eM noah Iu i ie bM o I 99 MEME LAN t 111 4 1 c anise 135 Network Address Translation NUT juae enean terret hr dti F9 2a hk ket daa RR a d Re ERR dk ad 143 cesi 155 UE ele andthe Mags Tc vp dpm Te un meds omo bit studet dab oO n coL A Re 157 n7 Ee nist M 169 epi UD MEE TT 191 Do Gere Same KP Pe rer eer hee E rr errr 195 FRAC OE seca sis E T E T E AE TE T EE TT 217 SE RONE aa 219 nme Management e 223 Dynan I o i eed UNIT 235 uec mess 239 Universal Plug and Play UPDP 11r disc pei rk eto CY dtr tad P ot SOOO Rad cd 251 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 1 ucilaie een sana na naat us pha RtadanR 2E nR ca ta kA Eta EO RERIU PMR RR Ma EaE QAREEE 263 cir e 265 LUE epee ere re Had esi ete Q
274. gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you use ENET address ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen First DNS Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP Server clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Second DNS As above Server Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 29 Internet Connection with PPPoA STE Sarees ffi Internet Configuration Please enter the User Name and Password given to you by your Internet Service Provider here User Name Password Note Device is automatically configured to obtain an IP address automatically The ISP will assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 12 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the login name that your ISP gives you Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes Ifthe user name and or password you en
275. hapter 8 Powerline P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Network Address Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the P 660HWP Dx 9 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 9 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host is located relative to the P 660HWP Dx for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 47 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This ref
276. hcp SERCTL no ERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet ucGUOog Ifyou have a static IP address enter static in the BOOTPROTO field Type IPADDR followed by the IP address in dotted decimal notation and type NETMASK followed by the subnet mask The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192 168 1 10 and the subnet mask 1s 255 255 255 0 Figure 208 Red Hat 9 0 Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig ethO DEVICE ethO0 ONBOOT yes BOOTPROTO static IPADDR 192 168 1 10 NETMASK 255 255 255 0 USERCTL no PEERDNS yes TYPE Ethernet 2 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es enter the DNS server information in the resolv conf file in the etc directory The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified Figure 209 Red Hat 9 0 DNS Settings in resolv conf nameserver 172 23 5 1 nameserver 172 23 5 2 3 After you edit and save the configuration files you must restart the network card Enter network restart inthe etc rc d init d directory The following figure shows an example Figure 210 Red Hat 9 0 Restart Ethernet Card root localhost init d network restart Shutting down interface eth0 OK Shutting down loopback interface OK Setting network parameters OK Bringing up loopback interface OK Bringing up interface eth0 OK P 660HWP Dx User s Guide
277. he IP address of the network device MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed IP address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen 2 4 4 Status WLAN Status Click the WLAN Status hyperlink in the Status screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the P 660HWP Dx Figure 15 Status WLAN Status Wireless LAN Association List 2 S MAC Address Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status WLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of an associated wireless station MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of an associated wireless station Association This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the P 660HWP Dx Time Refresh Click Refresh to reload this screen 2 4 5 Status Bandwidth Status Click the Bandwidth Status hyperlink in the Status screen Select an interface from the drop down list box to view the bandwidth usage of its bandwidth rules The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use P 6
278. he LAN do not need PPPoE software installed since the P 660HWP Dx does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANs computers will have access P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 5 WAN Setup 5 1 1 3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The P 660HWP Dx encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP 5 1 1 4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information 5 1 2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP 5 1 2 1 VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be
279. he P 6G60HWP Dx itself as the gateway for each subnet Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your P 660HWP Dx You can also set the time manually These dates and times are then used in logs Logging and Tracing Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting You can send logs from the P 660HWP Dx to an external syslog server PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial up Internet access connection PPTP Encapsulation Point to Point Tunneling Protocol PPTP enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network VPN The P 660HWP Dx supports one PPTP connection at a time Universal Plug and Play UPnP A UPnP enabled device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network Firewall You can configure firewall on the P 660HWP Dx for secure Internet access When the firewall is on by default all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 136 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Content Filter The P 660HWP Dx blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and block
280. he same speed or duplex mode setting as the peer Ethernet port in order to connect For the WAN port it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate Summary Any IP Table Use this screen to view a list of IP addresses and MAC addresses of computers which are not in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx WLAN Status Wireless devices only This screen displays the MAC address es of the wireless stations that are currently associating with the P 660HWP Dx Bandwidth Status Use this screen to view the P 660HWP Dx s bandwidth usage and allotments Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics Powerline Status This screen indicates the status of your Powerline network connection 2 4 3 Status Any IP Table Click the Any IP Table hyperlink in the Status screen The Any IP table shows current read only information including the IP address and the MAC address of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx Figure 14 Status Any IP Table AnyIP Table zx pg TES Kal F IP Address Refresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Status Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the host computer IP Address This field displays t
281. hentication Types esseeessseecesssessesrnresrsrsessssnneesrsnaasstennnaatnennesenens 319 Table 142 Wireless Security Relational Matrix eeeseeeessesseesrresersrrreseeerreesrnnnessrsnneeernnnaaaenenneasnnnaanenna 322 Table 143 Abbreviations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table 328 Tabla t44 Menu 1 Genaral SEUD 12 usd de OD aaa Doa bos b ec i old dde lode 328 Us cS SM ede EEUU 328 Table 146 Menu 4 Internet Access GOD cicicsiccecsscciascctisicssnetvravins snsin Qn rhe pe e bep Ibo 651 EXER ERV PP CUL o Et AER ER 2cR 330 Is raa M pcm dme 332 Table 148 Menu 15 SUA Server SSID 12 icr HERD FEERES HERO PH Sa Ur R Po IRNERERE IN ER RE A 332 Tabs T49 Manu zT FIKO Sel S1 oasis races e e e tom aa Feed p a e e EE PER RH re Ca 334 Table 150 Menu 21 1 Filter Set F2 esi p erbe d i ERR Ue vp ERA TE Yvan boa Ronde aiaia aaa Eur E t 335 Table 151 Menu 29 Gystem MOUS 337 Table 152 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control entrent nn 338 Table T53 Command Exam ples a coo Eu de pb rkuciqu EFbRU NU ERO Ur ae DR sie aie IN AM MEE 339 Table 154 Classes of IP Addresses Ludus cu cieieb veni Ug eer Reo ET ERI FOE toni d iE EXE Ht d D eL LG ERR er Evae E aces 357 Table 155 Allowed IP Address Range By Class sse ennemis 358 Tape 10 Naural o o o S 0 UE 358 Table 157 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ret rho EIER Ebr i Sd eX EIER 693 o a 4I E add 359 TONE T99 MO SUDTIETS E
282. horities may use rsa pkcs1 md5 RSA public private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate s key pair the P 560HWP Dx uses RSA encryption and the length of the key set in bits 1024 bits for example Subject Alternative Name This field displays the certificate owner s IP address IP domain name DNS or e mail address EMAIL Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate s key can be used For example DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate For example Subject Type CA means that this is a certification authority s certificate and Path Length Constraint 1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate s path MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate s
283. hout problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 6 2 2 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the P 660HWP Dx will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives n Only the P 660HWP Dx will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Out Only
284. hout the P 660HWP Dx s intervention 6 1 4 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen The P 660HWP Dx acts as a DNS proxy when the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields are left as 0 0 0 0 in the DHCP Setup screen 6 2 LAN TCP IP The P 660HWP Dx has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 6 2 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask Ifthe ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP w
285. i 65 Table 12 Internet Cotinection witht PPPOA 215 coder t Ma rre ra Fi di esce ed vete bb oae e eae 66 Table T3 Wireless LAN Set p Wizard T Lee tete ette pu aa ee c rae atv etx e tad ie Po EAE RE 68 Tabe 14 Wireless LAN Eis pP 69 Table 15 Manually assign a WPA KOy disse en roa tit tubo c bru EUb ba dk tapas enue REPE d BE Ko Fa ARa RR RR ttn d tbe dui 70 Table t5 Manually assign a WEP KOy aede ieu EU PERPE ERE dane Fr EDU READER 71 Table 17 Media Bandwidth Management Setup Services eeeeeeseeeeeeneeneeennnnnnnn 73 Table 18 Bandwidth Management Wizard General Information cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 75 Table 19 Bandwidth Management Wizard Configuration ssssssseeee nemen 76 Tabe 20 p iie II e cIMMTECEP H 87 Table 21 Advanced Intermet Connection Setup 121 5 xp rtr Rate open ERER PRI ERE AR Re ena M bebo NAME REMIT BEAMER 89 Tade 22 More CopnephonS Me tas tepudesoutcaghuatesivedtssccxasbesinsctes odusstoviehie anian Eiis 91 Tabe 23 More Connections Edi M NVRMEE DT TR UU TN 92 Table 24 More Connections Advanced Setup cccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeecenaceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeescenaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeees 94 Tabte 2S WAN BSCR Sell 2 2 sasceseasdsasedesesanongsuateiucacsencavsandesseayeads dE UE Fe L v S RP LRFE PEOR RES 96 iE cuc m D ER E TU THPTRU NATU NET 105 Table 2 Advanced OAM SGtUP e 105 TDI 28 DBEGPOSBIBEC alsa tails
286. ig edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr subnet lt ip address gt lt subnet mask gt This command sets a rule to have the P 660HWP Dx check for traffic from a particular subnet defined by IP address and subnet mask config edit firewall set lt set gt rule lt rule gt srcaddr range lt start ip address gt lt end ip address gt This command sets a rule to have the P 660HWP Dx check for traffic from this range of addresses P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix G Firewall Commands Table 168 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall set set This command sets the rule to have the P i rule rule 4 destaddr 660HWP Dx check for traffic with this single ip address individual destination address config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P i rule rule 4 destaddr 660HWP Dx check for traffic with a particular subnet ip address subnet subnet destination defined by IP address and mask subnet mask config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P gt rule rule gt destaddr 660HWP Dx check for traffic going to this range start ip address end range of addresses ip address config edit firewall set set This command sets a rule to have the P 4 rule rule gt TCP destport 660H
287. ill assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the P 660HWP Dx The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your P 660HWP Dx but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your P 660HWP Dx will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the P 660HWP Dx unless you are instructed to do otherwise 6 2 1 1 Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts wit
288. ime zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Enable Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 System Table 108 System Time Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday April and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Savi
289. indow and click Next 18 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the P 660HWP Dx Turn on your computer and the P 660HWP Dx 18 4 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties Figure 151 Network Connections Network Connections File Q Back P d 2 Search lE Folders Ez Address Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help e Metwork Connections S F m gt m eT ea t er m t t lt Network Tasks s Create a new connection Internet Connection Disable LAN or H Status Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device m Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this Create Shortcut E alli Rename Properties 3 Inthe Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created 52 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 152 Internet Connect
290. ing echo replies outgoing address mask requests will allow incoming address mask replies and outgoing timestamp requests will allow incoming timestamp replies No other ICMP packets are allowed in through the firewall simply because they are too dangerous and contain too little tracking information For instance ICMP redirect packets are never allowed in since they could be used to reroute traffic through attacking machines 10 5 5 Upper Layer Protocols Some higher layer protocols such as FTP and RealAudio utilize multiple network connections simultaneously In general terms they usually have a control connection which is used for sending commands between endpoints and then data connections which are used for transmitting bulk information Consider the FTP protocol A user on the LAN opens a control connection to a server on the Internet and requests a file At this point the remote server will open a data connection from the Internet For FTP to work properly this connection must be allowed to pass through even though a connection from the Internet would normally be rejected In order to achieve this the P 660HWP Dx inspects the application level FTP data Specifically it searches for outgoing PORT commands and when it sees these it adds a cache entry for the anticipated data connection This can be done safely since the PORT command contains address and port information which can be used to uniquely identify the connection
291. ion Create Click Create to go to the screen where you can have the P 660HWP Dx generate a certificate or a certification request Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the P 660HWP Dx Refresh Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates 13 6 My Certificates gt Details Click Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen see Figure 115 on page 38 Click the edit icon to open the My Certificate Details screen You can use this screen to view in depth certificate information and change the certificate s name If it is a self signed certificate you can also set the P 660HWP Dx to use the certificate to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 71 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Edit Certificate Name Property Vv Certificate Path Default self signed certificate which signs the imported remote host certificates auto_generated_self_signed_cert Searching 4 Certificate Informations Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format
292. ion Properties E H Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Settings Show icon in notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings Figure 153 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Mdvancec Settings I Services Selec Ihe ssvicer running on pour melwok that Intemel user can aas Seraces mernege 192 168 1 88 3853 27111 UDP msraso 192 166 1 91 7281 26097 UDP V mesg 192 1681 97 7810 21711 TCP P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 154 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 158 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on your network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP UDP Internal Port number for this service 144 Cancel BES When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Figure 155 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connec
293. irewall General General M Active Firewall Bypass Triangle Route A Caution When Bypass Triangle Route is checked all LAN to LAN and WAN to WAN packets will bypass the Firewall check Packet Direction Default Action ee eet xl WAN to LAN poo LAN to WAN Permit gt WAN to WAN Router pep LAN to LAN Router Permit gt 7588 Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Firewall General LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall The P 660HWP Dx performs access control and protects against Denial of Service DoS attacks when the firewall is activated Bypass Triangle Route Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx firewall permit the use of triangle route topology on the network See the appendix for more on triangle route topology Note Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the router See Appendix J on page 383 for more on triangle route topology and how to deal with this problem Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets LAN to LAN Router LAN to WAN WAN to WAN Router WAN to LAN Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply For example LAN to LAN Router means packets traveling
294. is N A for One to One Many to One and Server mapping types Server Mapping Only available when Type is set to Server Set Select a number from the drop down menu to choose a server mapping set Edit Details Click this link to go to the Port Forwarding screen to edit a server mapping set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field Back Click Back to return to the previous screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT Table 54 Edit Address Mapping Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART IV Security Firewalls 157 Firewall Configuration 169 Content Filtering 191 Certificates 195 Firewalls This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and introduces the P 660HWP Dx firewall 10 1 Firewall Overview Originally the term firewall referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another The networking term firewall is a system or group of systems that enforces an access control policy between two networks It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from an untrusted network Of course firewalls cannot solve every security problem A firewall is one of the mechanisms used t
295. is about to expire or has already expired Modify Click the details icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate Use the export icon to save the certificate to a computer Click the icon and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save Click the delete icon to remove the certificate A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action Import Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a remote host which you trust from your computer to the P 660HWP Dx Refresh Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates 13 13 Trusted Remote Hosts gt Import Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen and then click Import to open the Trusted Remote Host Import screen You may have peers with certificates that you want to trust but the certificates were not signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save a peer s certificates from a computer to the P 660HWP Dx You do not need to add any certificate that is signed by one of the certification authorities on the Trusted CAs screen since the P 660HWP Dx automatically accepts any valid cer
296. is in most Windows computers click Start gt Run enter cmd and then enter ipconfig The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the P 660HWP Dx it depends on the network so enter this IP address in your Internet browser 3 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 46 forgot the password 1 The default user password is user The default administrator password is 1234 2 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 46 e cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 Ifyou changed the IP address Section 6 2 1 on page 101 use the new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the P 660HWP Dx 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled See Appendix H on page 375 4 If you disabled Any IP Section 6 2 4 on page 103 make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx If you know that there are routers between your computer and the P 660HWP Dx skip this step Ifthere is a DHCP server on your network
297. is is the certificate s message digest that the P 660HWP Dx calculated using the SHA1 algorithm The P 660HWP Dx uses one of its own self signed certificates to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates This changes the fingerprint value displayed here so it does not match the original See Section 13 3 on page 36 for how to verify a remote host s certificate before you import it into the P 660HWP Dx Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click Back to go to the previous screen Export Click Export to export a file containing the details of your certificate Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx You can only change the name of the certificate Cancel Click Cancel to quit configuring this screen and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates 13 15 Directory Servers Click Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers to open the Directory Servers screen This screen
298. ith Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request packets pings Since the destination IP address of each packet is the broadcast address of the network the router will broadcast the ICMP echo request packet to all hosts on the network If there are numerous hosts this will create a large amount of ICMP echo request and response traffic If a hacker chooses to spoof the source IP address of the ICMP echo request packet the resulting ICMP traffic will not only clog up the intermediary network but will also congest the network of the spoofed source IP address known as the victim network This flood of broadcast traffic consumes all available bandwidth making communications impossible Figure 95 Smurf Attack Ping Responses Attacker broadcasts ping Every host on the packets with a spoofed source intermediary network address to every host on responds by sending the intermediary network responses to every host on the victim network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 10 4 2 1 ICMP Vulnerability ICMP is an error reporting protocol that works in concert with IP The following ICMP types trigger an alert Table 56 ICMP Commands That Trigger Alerts 5 REDIRECT 13 TIMESTAMP_REQUEST 14 TIMESTAMP_REPLY 17 ADDRESS_MASK_REQUEST 18 ADDRESS_MASK_REPLY 10 4 2 2 Illegal Commands NetBIOS and SMTP The only legal NetBIOS commands are the following all other
299. itiation packet originates on the LAN this means that someone is trying to make a connection from the LAN to the Internet Assuming that this is an acceptable part of the security policy as is the case with the default policy the connection will be allowed A cache entry is added which includes connection information such as IP addresses TCP ports sequence numbers etc When the P 660HWP Dx receives any subsequent packet from the Internet or from the LAN its connection information is extracted and checked against the cache A packet is only allowed to pass through if it corresponds to a valid connection that is if it is a response to a connection which originated on the LAN 10 5 4 UDP ICMP Security UDP and ICMP do not themselves contain any connection information such as sequence numbers However at the very minimum they contain an IP address pair source and destination UDP also contains port pairs and ICMP has type and code information All of this data can be analyzed in order to build virtual connections in the cache For instance any UDP packet that originates on the LAN will create a cache entry Its IP address and port pairs will be stored For a short period of time UDP packets from the WAN that have matching IP and UDP information will be allowed back in through the firewall A similar situation exists for ICMP except that the P 660HWP Dx is even more restrictive Specifically only outgoing echoes will allow incom
300. ity Mode Choose No Security from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup 7 4 2 WEP Encryption WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless clients and the access points to keep network communications private It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network Both the wireless clients and the access points must use the same WEP key Your P 660HWP Dx allows you to configure up to four 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time In order to configure and enable WEP encryption click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 64 Wireless Static WEP Encryption Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL T Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz Scan Security Security Mode Static WEP Passphrase Generate WEP Key q Note The different WEP key lengths configure different strength security 40 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit respectively Your wireless client must match the security strength set on the router Please
301. k Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 5 OTIST In a wireless network the wireless clients must have the same SSID and security settings as the access point AP or wireless router we will refer to both as AP here in order to associate with it Traditionally this meant that you had to configure the settings on the AP and then manually configure the exact same settings on each wireless client OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology allows you to transfer your AP s SSID and WPA PSK security settings to wireless clients that support OTIST and are within transmission range You can also choose to have OTIST generate a WPA PSK key for you if you didn t configure one manually LES OTIST replaces the pre configured wireless settings on the wireless clients 7 5 1 Enabling OTIST You must enable OTIST on both the AP and wireless client before you start transferring settings The AP and wireless client s MUST use the same Setup key 7 5 1 1 AP You can enable OTIST using the RESET button or the web configurator 7 5 1 1 1 Reset button If you use the RESET button the default 01234567 or previous saved through the web configurator Setup key is used to encrypt the settings that you want to transfer Hold in the RESET button for three to eight seconds P 660HW
302. kXUUutX711 INOkSPB6x7pIiZ lOAxafUSGMArQIDAQABoO0gwRj AOBgNVHQSGBAQAEBAMCAqQwIAYD IVRORBBkwF 4EVZmF jdG9yeUBhdXRvLmdlbis5jZXJOMBIGA1UdEvEBAAQIMAYBAfSC AQEwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEFBQADQQBHAP6Dri1COHsugLf6Rhb4MCtLOmUNWFGw6jgpYb P1G43kH43d40bO0xSsNXx7rd5qGjEJnzPrlM4TScB7hJiJQff 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Certification Name This field displays the identifying name of this certificate If you want to change the name type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate You may use any character not including spaces Certificate Path Click the Refresh button to have this read only text box display the end entity s own certificate and a list of certification authority certificates in the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate a certificate s issuing certification authority For a trusted host the list consists of the end entity s own certificate and the default self signed certificate that the P 660HWP Dx uses to sign remote host certificates Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path Certificate These read only fields display detailed information about the certificate Information Type This field displays general information about the certificate With trusted remote host certificates this field always displays CA signed The P 660HWP Dx is the Cer
303. ke priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen This is your firewall rule number The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn Active This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not Select the check box to enable the rule Clear the check box to disable the rule Source IP This drop down list box displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Destination IP This drop down list box displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any Service This drop down list box displays the services to which this firewall rule applies See Section 11 8 on page 61 for more information Action This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets Drop discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Reject or allows the passage of packets Permit Schedule This field tells you whether a schedule is specified Yes or not No P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Table 60 Firewall Rules continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Log This field shows you whether a log is created when packets m
304. l supports TCP UDP inspection and DoS Denial of Services detection and prevention as well as real time alerts reports and logs A typical Internet access application is shown below P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx Figure 1 Protected Internet Access Applications Powerline n 1 T N BE A A WLAN um W A atta m A Ig Internet A You can also use the P 660HWP Dx to connect two geographically dispersed networks over the ADSL line A typical LAN to LAN application example is shown as follows i B HHH n l o r i r p Z Figure 2 LAN to LAN Application Example LAN E a ZI SER INAN Su BE m yZ yw The P 660HWP Dx is compatible with the ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 standards Maximum data rates attainable for each standard are shown in the next table Table 1 ADSL Standards DATARATESTANDARD UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM ADSL 832 kbps 8Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 12Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 24Mbps BES If your P 660HWP Dx does not support Annex M the maximum ADSL2 2 upstream data rate is 1 2 Mbps P 660HWP Dxs which work over ISDN do not support Annex M P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx LES The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable Actual speeds attained also
305. lection box and click Details P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 149 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components 2 Management and Monitoring Tools Networking Services ad Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB 5 Inthe Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Figure 150 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services O AIP Listener 0 0 MB il Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB g sal Plug and Play Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard w
306. ll possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly It is not possible to use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database In this case it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database When you select WPA2 or WPA2 PSK in your P 660HWP Dx you can also select an option WPA compatible to support WPA as well In this case if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2 you should set up WPA2 PSK or WPA2 depending on the type of wireless network login and select the WPA compatible option in the P 660HWP Dx Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network The longer the key the stronger the encryption Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key 7 3 5 One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST With ZyXEL s OTIST you set up the SSID and WPA PSK on the P 660HWP Dx Then the P 660HWP Dx transfers them to the devices in the wireless networks As a result you do not have to set up the SSID and encryption on every device in the wireless network The devices in the wireless network have to support OTIST and they have to be in range of the P 660HWP Dx when you activate it See Section 7 5 on page 47 for more details 7 4 General Wireless LAN Screen BS Use this screen to configure your wireless settings If you
307. lloved to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service HTTPS Server Host Key Select the Server Certificate that the P 660HWP Dx will use to identify itself The P 660HWP Dx is the SSL server and must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the P 660HWP Dx Authenticate Client Certificates Select Authenticate Client Certificates optional to require the SSL client to authenticate itself to the P 660HWP Dx by sending the P 660HWP Dx a certificate To do that the SSL client must have a CA signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on the P 660HWP Dx Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is alloved to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to ac
308. ly Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Content Filtering This chapter covers how to configure content filtering 12 1 Content Filtering Overview Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs Content filtering gives you the ability to block web sites that contain key words that you specify in the URL You can set a schedule for when the P 660HWP Dx performs content filtering You can also specify trusted IP addresses on the LAN for which the P 660HWP Dx will not perform content filtering 12 2 Configuring Keyword Blocking Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL For example if you enable the keyword bad the P 660HWP Dx blocks all sites containing this keyword including the URL http www website com bad html even if it is not included in the Filter List To have your P 660HWP Dx block Web sites containing keywords in their URLs click Security gt Content Filter The screen appears as shown Figure 109 Content Filter Keyword Keyword M Active Keyword Blocking Block Websites that contain these keywords in the URL bad Delete Clear All Keyword Add Keyword Apply Cancel P 66
309. m received CRL the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Failed to d received ARL code th The router received a corrupted ARL Authority Revocation List from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field Revd data lt size gt too large Max size allowed lt max size gt The router received directory data that was too large the size is listed from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded Cert trusted lt subject name gt The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name Due to lt reason codes gt cert not trusted lt subject name gt Due to the reasons listed the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate Please see Table 125 on page 49 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 125 Certificate Path Verification Failure Reason Codes CODE DESCRIPTION Algorithm mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints Key usage mismatch between the certificate and the search constraints Certificate was not valid in the time interval Not used Certificate is n
310. mal route all you need to do is set the dial backup route s metric to 1 and the others to 2 or greater IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above 5 3 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum v
311. mand interpreter interface Configuring What You Want the P 660HWP Dx to Log 1 Use the sys logs load command to load the log setting buffer that allows you to configure which logs the P 660HWP Dx is to record 2 Use sys logs category to view a list of the log categories Figure 212 Displaying Log Categories Example Copyright c 1994 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp ras Valid commands are Sys exit ether aux ip ipsec bridge bm certificates cnm 8021x radius ras 3 Use sys logs category followed by a log category to display the parameters that are available for the category Figure 213 Displaying Log Parameters Example ras sys logs category access Usage 0 none 1 10g 2 alert 3 both 0 don t show debug type 1 show debug type 4 Use sys logs category followed by a log category and a parameter to decide what to record Use 0 to not record logs for that category 1 to record only logs for that category 2 to record only alerts for that category and 3 to record both logs and alerts for that category Not every parameter is available with every category 5 Use the sys logs save command to store the settings in the P 660HWP Dx you must do this in order to record logs Displaying Logs Use the sys logs display command to show all of the logs in the P 660HWP Dx s log Use the sys logs category display command to show the log settings for all of the log categories P 660HWP Dx User
312. mbers Table 50 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT Table 50 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 9 5 3 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example b A 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 1 wl LAN coc B 192 168 1 34 E lt 5 sy Internet gt SEES Brim j c 192 168 1 35 c EE IP address D 192 168 1 36 assigned by ISP 9 6 Configuring Port Forwarding ES The Port Forwarding screen is available only when you select SUA Only in the NAT gt General screen LES If you d
313. me eeesssee eise tenta nna tha ka ana aa RR RA anu EI uAA 265 1912 General SEP e 265 Pa TE a T a EAN 267 Chapter 20 Boo E A A A A ETEA 271 CUNNE IIR I 1 eee AE E EE E EE A EOE VE E E EE E E rer 271 ETA an O a 271 20 2 Vien no ME LOGE iss reds casa ea rm PTT 271 20 3 COMNQUIING LOG E uio T 272 2D S T Example E mail LO iicosserierris pet do eq ntt eb a arg P n it S dap d 274 PUE MESSER eei m I mM 275 Chapter 21 TOO Scii a a a PE 289 Zi Fanner CNS saia 289 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents vul SoH MELON SCRE ssssansutes ssnaxsaesaansnaseHt vicaavengsssaaasntssasandenesscansestasacansagsasianiaass Maanauasia eed 291 V RUNI D hEesyturi s PP 291 21 2 2 iunii M 292 21252 Bak ito Fact DoE 1o a rei ato praec edil n c D t pad Unda 293 FAR cium 293 Chapter 22 Diagnos rice D P ena 295 PSEMELODLIR D Do E 295 Poo B MIN pop ocu c a TNT 296 Chapter 23 Bs o MMT iaisis 297 23 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS ioissaco cr prat DU ed Eb ta Dit ctt Fui drei der eiae 297 23 2 P OBOHWEP Dx Access and LOIN uiuere eaten trei tpa Eae n aad 298 23 2 MOME ACE Se LL o Hte EI queunt m bivio uut ata um 299 23 4 Powarine S00 PRI T MET 301 Part VII Appendices and Index ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseees 303
314. meout of five minutes three hundred seconds The P 660HWP Dx automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling 17 2 WWW To change your P 660HWP Dx s World Wide Web settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen Figure 136 Remote Management WWW www Port eo Access Status Lan amp WAN Y Secured Client IP C all Selected 0 0 0 0 HTTPS Server Host Key auto generated self signed cert lisee My Certificates Authenticate Client Certificates See Trusted CAs Port a3 Access Status All Secured Client IP Gal C selected 0 0 00 q Note 1 For UPnP to function normally the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP 2 You may also need to create a Firewallrule Apply Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Remote Management WWW LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management Access Status Select the interface s through which a computer may access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is a
315. message digest that the P 660HWP Dx calculated using the MD5 algorithm SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate s message digest that the P 660HWP Dx calculated using the SHA1 algorithm Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authority s web page an e mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment You can copy and paste a certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the example P 660HWP Dx User s Guide file on a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for Chapter 13 Certificates Table 72 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Back Click Back to go the previous screen Export Click Export to export a file containing your certificate details Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx You can only change the name except in the case of a self signed certificate which you can also set to be the default self signed certificate that signs the imported trusted
316. mmand sets the IP address to which the e mail messages are sent config edit firewall e mail return addr lt e mail address gt This command sets the source e mail address of the firewall e mails config edit firewall e mail email to lt e mail address gt This command sets the e mail address to which the firewall e mails are sent config edit firewall e mail policy lt full hourly daily weekly gt This command sets how frequently the firewall log is sent via e mail config edit firewall e mail day lt sunday monday tuesday wednesday thursday friday saturday gt This command sets the day on which the current firewall log is sent through e mail if the P 660HWP Dx is set to send it on a weekly basis config edit firewall e mail hour 0 23 This command sets the hour when the firewall log is sent through e mail if the P 660HWP Dx is set to send it on an hourly daily or weekly basis config edit firewall e mail minute 0 59 This command sets the minute of the hour for the firewall log to be sent via e mail if the P 660HWP Dx is set to send it on a hourly daily or weekly basis Attack config edit firewall attack send alert yes no This command enables or disables the immediate sending of DOS attack notification e mail messages config edit firewall attack block yes no Set this command to yes to block new traffic after
317. more information on the RESET button 21 3 Restart System restart allows you to reboot the P 660HWP Dx without turning the power off Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Restart Click Restart to have the P 660HWP Dx reboot This does not affect the P 660HWP Dx s configuration Figure 173 Restart Screen System Reboot Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS or PWR LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again Restart P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Diagnostic These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the P 660HWP Dx 22 1 General Diagnostic Click Maintenance gt Diagnostic to open the screen shown next Figure 174 Diagnostic General General Resolving 192 168 1 34 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Reply from 192 168 1 34 Ping Host Successful TCP IP Address Ping The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 133 Diagnostic General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Address Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 22 Diagnostic
318. more information Return 21 2 Configuration Screen Use this screen to manage your the configuration settings on your device 21 2 1 Backup Configuration Click Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Information related to factory defaults backup configuration and restoring configuration appears as shown next Figure 169 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration Configuration Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration to you computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file on your computer to the router please type a location for storing the configuration file or click Browse to look for one and then click Upload File Path Browse Reset to Factory Default Settings Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration and return the router to the factory default settings The following default settings would become effective after click Reset Password 1234 Lan IP 192 168 1 1 DHCP Server Backup configuration allows you to back up save the P 660HWP Dx s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your P 660HWP Dx is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings Table 131 Maintenance gt Tools gt Configuration LABEL DESCRI
319. n Firewall Rules Storage Space in Use 3 Create a new rule after rule number IE 7 Add Pcie corinne serce peuonfoenesmeltorf roai order 1 WV any 1000110 100 015 MyService TCPJUDP 123 Permit No No EP fw bN 10095 wan to LAN Apply Cancel 11 8 Predefined Services The Available Services list box in the Edit Rule screen see Section 11 6 1 on page 53 displays all predefined services that the P 660HWP Dx already supports Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the default configuration labeled DNS UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 Up to 128 entries are supported Custom service ports may also be configured using the Edit Customized Services function discussed previously Table 64 Predefined Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM NEW_ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 24032 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software DNS UDP
320. n a management computer for later distribution via floppy disk for example Back Click Back to go to the previous screen Export Click Export to send a file containing your certificate details Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx You can only change the name and or set whether or not you want the P 660HWP Dx to check the CRL that the certification authority issues before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted CAs screen 13 11 Trusted CA gt Import Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen and then click Import to open the Trusted CA Import screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certification authority s certificate from a computer to the P 660HWP Dx The P 660HWP Dx trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import the certificate P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Figure 120 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Import Certificates Trusted CAs Import Please specify the location of the certificate file to be imported The certificate file must be in one of the following formats Binary X 509 PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded
321. n a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs for example 12 34 56 78 9a bc Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen 7 7 WMM QoS WMM Wi Fi MultiMedia QoS Quality of Service allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services WMM is a part of the IEEE 802 11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi Fi wireless networks 7 7 1 WMM QoS Example When WMM QoS is not enabled all traffic streams are given the same access throughput to the wireless network If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission demand that exceeds the current network capacity then the new traffic stream reduces the throughput of the other traffic streams When WMM Qos is enabled the streams are prioritized according to the needs of the application You can assign different priorities to different applications This prevents reductions in data transmission for applications that are sensitive 7 7 2 WMM QoS Priorities The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the P 660HWP Dx sends to the wireless network Table 40 WMM QoS Priorities LABEL DESCRIPTION Highest Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter variations in delay Use the highest priority to reduce latency for impr
322. n all of your powerline adapters P The signal on my powerline network is weak 1 Do not plug the devices in electrical surge protectors as they may decrease the powerline signal 2 Place the powerline devices away from appliances such as refrigerators or air conditioners that consume a lot of power 3 Place the powerline devices away from electrical insect killers as the radio waves will interfere with the powerline signals P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 23 Troubleshooting 4 Avoid wiring that is old low quality or with a long wiring path as this may affect the quality of your powerline signal P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART VII Appendices and Index Product Specifications and Wall Mounting 305 Wireless LANs 311 Internal SPTGEN 325 Setting up Your Computer s IP Address 341 IP Subnetting 357 Command Interpreter 365 Firewall Commands 369 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 375 NetBIOS Filter Commands 381 Triangle Route 383 Legal Information 385 Customer Support 389 Index 395 Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Product Specifications The following tables summarize the P 660HWP Dx s hardware and firmware features M4 Table 135 Hardware Specifications Dimensions W x D x H 250 x 170 x 36 mm Power Specification Input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Output 12V AC 1A Built in Switch Four auto negotiating au
323. n something is not working and after you have checked the firewall counters These default values should work fine for most small offices Factors influencing choices for threshold values are The maximum number of opened sessions The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network The CPU power of servers in your LAN network Network bandwidth Type of traffic for certain servers If your network is slower than average for any of these factors especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy then the default values should be reduced You should make any changes to the threshold values before you continue configuring firewall rules P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 11 10 2 Half Open Sessions An unusually high number of half open sessions either an absolute number or measured as the arrival rate could indicate that a Denial of Service attack is occurring For TCP half open means that the session has not reached the established state the TCP three way handshake has not yet been completed see Figure 93 on page 38 For UDP half open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic The P 660HWP Dx measures both the total number of existing half open sessions and the rate of session establishment attempts Both TCP and UDP half open sessions are counted in the total number and rate measurements Measurements are made once a minute
324. n the IP Address field IP Address If your ISP gave you an IP address to use enter it here Subnet Mask ENET ENCAP encapsulation only Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP address ENET ENCAP encapsulation only You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field Connection PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time Connection The P 660HWP Dx will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time Demand and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced Internet Connection Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup 5 5 1 Configuring Advanced Internet Connection Setup To edit your P 660HWP Dx s advanced WAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in th
325. nation where the certificate owner is located You may use any character including spaces but the P 660HWP Dx drops trailing spaces Key Length Select a number from the drop down list box to determine how many bits the key should use 512 to 2048 The longer the key the more secure it is A longer key also uses more PKI storage space Enrollment Options These radio buttons deal with how and when the certificate is to be generated Create a self signed certificate Select Create a self signed certificate to have the P 660HWP Dx generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority CA itself This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment Select Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment to have the P 660HWP Dx generate and store a request for a certificate Use the My Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen see Section 13 6 on page 39 and then send it to the certification authority Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online Select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online to have the P 560HWP Dx generate a request for a certificate and
326. nd includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate s key pair the P 660HWP Dx uses RSA encryption and the length of the key set in bits 1024 bits for example Subject Alternative Name This field displays the certificate s owner s IP address IP domain name DNS or e mail address EMAIL Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate s key can be used For example DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text Basic Constraint This field displays general information about the certificate For example Subject Type CA means that this is a certification authority s certificate and Path Length Constraint 1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate s path MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate s message digest that the P 560HWP Dx calculated using the MD5 algorithm The P 660HWP Dx uses one of its own self signed certificates to sign the imported trusted remote host certificates This changes the fingerprint value displayed here so it does not match the original See Section 13 3 on page 36 for how to verify a remote host s certificate before you import it into the P 660HWP Dx SHA Fingerprint Th
327. ndard enabling networking using standard electrical wiring In the P 660HWP Dx product name H denotes an integrated 4 port switch hub and W denotes an included wireless LAN card that provides wireless connectivity P denotes power line connection capability See the Product Specifications appendix for a full list of features Model names ending in 1 for example P 660H HW D Series denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Model names ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network The DSL RJ 11 ADSL over POTS models or RJ 45 ADSL over ISDN models connects to your ADSL or ISDN enabled telephone line The included power cable and plug connects to your power line enabled home wiring lt gt Only use firmware for your P 660HWP Dx s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your P 660HWP Dx The P 660HWP Dx is the ideal high speed Internet access solution It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers and supports the ADSL standards as shown in Table 1 on page 36 In addition the P 660HWP Dx with its wireless features allows wireless clients access to your wired network resources and to the Internet The P 660HWP Dx provides protection from attacks by Internet hackers By default the firewall blocks all incoming traffic from the WAN The firewal
328. ne adapter to a router or switch on the first Ethernet network and assign a network password for example Password1 to this powerline adapter Add additional powerline adapters to your network by plugging them into your powerline outlets and assigning them the same network password Password1 This completes the configuration of your first powerline network Connect another powerline adapter to a router or switch on the second Ethernet network and assign a different network password for example Password2 to this powerline adapter Again add additional powerline adapters and assign them the same second network password Password2 You now have two private networks on your powerline circuit Information is not shared between the two networks as only powerline adapters with the same password can communicate with each other The following figure shows two private powerline networks on the same electrical circuit Figure 80 Two Private Powerline Networks on One Circuit f i ipia es Password 1 x SSS eee P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Powerline 8 3 Configuring Local Settings Use the Local Setting screen to enter the network password for the network you wish to configure You can also change the Device Access Key for your P 660HWP Dx from this screen Click Network gt Powerline to access the settings of your local station Figure 81 Network gt Powerline gt Local Setti
329. needed by technicians to help troubleshoot problems WAN Information DSL Mode This is the standard that your P GG60HWP Dx is using IP Address This is the WAN port IP address IP Subnet Mask This is the WAN port IP subnet mask Default Gateway This is the IP address of the default gateway if applicable VPI VCI This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the wizard or WAN screen LAN Information IP Address This is the LAN port IP address IP Subnet Mask This is the LAN port IP subnet mask DHCP This is the WAN port DHCP role Server Relay or None WLAN Information Wireless devices only SSID This is the descriptive name used to identify the P 660HWP Dx in the wireless LAN Channel This is the channel number used by the P 660HWP Dx now Security This displays the level of wireless security the P 660HWP Dx is using Security Firewall This displays whether or not the P 660HWP Dx s firewall is activated Content Filter This displays whether or not the P G60HWP Dx s content filtering is activated System Status System Uptime This is the total time the P 660HWP Dx has been on Current Date Time This field displays your P 660HWP Dx s present date and time System Mode This displays whether the P 660HWP Dx is functioning as a router or a bridge P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chap
330. neral Setup Menu 1 General Setup EL FN PVA INPUT 10000000 Configured lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 10000001 System Name lt Str gt Your Device 10000002 Location lt Str gt 10000003 Contact Person s Name lt Str gt 10000004 Route IP lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000006 Bridge lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 Table 145 Menu 3 Menu 3 1 General Ethernet Setup FIN E PVA INPUT 30100001 Input Protocol filters Set 1 2 30100002 Input Protocol filters Set 2 256 30100003 Input Protocol filters Set 3 256 30100004 Input Protocol filters Set 4 256 30100005 Input device filters Set 1 256 30100006 Input device filters Set 2 256 30100007 Input device filters Set 3 256 30100008 Input device filters Set 4 256 30100009 Output protocol filters Set 1 256 30100010 Output protocol filters Set 2 256 30100011 Output protocol filters Set 3 256 30100012 Output protocol filters Set 4 256 30100013 Output device filters Set 1 256 30100014 Output device filters Set 2 256 30100015 Output device filters Set 3 256 30100016 Output device filters Set 4 256 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN
331. net or any IP address Select an option from the drop down list box that includes Single Address Range Address Subnet Address and Any Address Start IP Address Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here End IP Address Enter the ending IP address in a range here Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask here if applicable Add gt gt Click Add gt gt to add a new address to the Source or Destination Address box You can add multiple addresses ranges of addresses and or subnets Edit lt lt To edit an existing source or destination address select it from the box and click Edit lt lt Delete Highlight an existing source or destination address from the Source or Destination Address box above and click Delete to remove it Services Available Selected Services Please see Section 11 8 on page 61 for more information on services available Highlight a service from the Available Services box on the left then click Add gt gt to add it to the Selected Services box on the right To remove a service highlight it in the Selected Services box on the right then click Remove Edit Customized Service Click the Edit Customized Services link to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services Schedule Day to Apply Select everyday or the day s of the week to apply the rule Time of Day to Appl
332. ng Local Setting M Enable PowerLine Password Network Password Device Access Key Network Local Station Setting sese oie eee IV Mask Network Password and Device Access Key Local Station MAC Address 00 13 49 d1 cb 88 q Note The same network stations must use same network password Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Network gt Powerline gt Local Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Local Station Setting This section describes the configuration of the HomePlug AV adapter you are using to access your power line network Enable Powerline Select this option to activate the powerline feature on your device This enables communication between different powerline adapters connected through standard power outlets and wiring Network Password This is the network password that powerline adapters use to authenticate devices within a powerline network The default network password of the P 660HWP Dx is HomePlugAV The P 660HWP Dx must use the same network password to recognize and communicate with other adapters over the powerline network If you change the password of one device on the network it will no longer be recognized as part of that network If you change the network password make sure you change the password for all of the powerline adapters that you want to be part of your powerline network The network password can be from 1 to
333. ng Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Last Sunday October and type 2 in the o clock field Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October The time you type in the o clock field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 19 System P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Logs This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the P 660HWP Dx s logs Refer to the appendix for example log message explanations 20 1 Logs Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and or alerts to have the P 660HWP Dx log and then display the logs or have the P 660HWP Dx send them to an administrator as e mail or to a
334. ns Control Strip ij Recent Documents Date amp Time cif Remote Access Status p Energy Saver Scrapbook Extensions Manager Sherlock 2 File Exchange 3 Speakable Items File Sharing y Stickies General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech LU p LU gt lom 4 TCP IP USB Printer Sharing 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 200 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP Li TCP IP E camest va Configure Using DHCP Server t DHCP Client ID l IP Address lt will be supplied by server 7 Setup Subnet mask lt will be supplied by server gt Router address lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans Name server addr x will be supplied by server 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually 44 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your P 660HWP Dx in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Tu
335. nsent Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 167 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 217 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups Pop up Blocker FAQ P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 37 Appendix H Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen 6 Click Apply to save this setting JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 218 Internet Options Security General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a W eb content zone to specify its security settings e Z o
336. nt rhet ea semeadicis nana Ead taken Ee RR B akku 153 Figure 92 Firewall AGPUGBUOM c 159 Figure d TR VY ES AS eds saccades t aito ESCLUSA NK NR RC RES FR Edd 160 Figure So dg mto teet 161 Figure 99 Smu iile o 161 sk Stateful epe ri RTT SUUS 163 Figure or Fite walle Fas Suisse tuve me tidatiiutidufeeceniulnterki tul epit tete etii ble fem itu M bus Peli bua fen tenes 172 Fours oG Frowa RUDS qw 174 Figure 09 Firewall EGI RUG dem 176 Figure TOO Firewall Customized SOrIViGes sciccccisssiceccssascescissscestssdsnccsnssetecgrvieancseasaatieaaseegnnees 178 Figure 101 Firewall Configure Customized Services cccccccessecccccessssccceeesnsececccensnaccceeenseaceceennsees 179 Foue 102 Frowal Example RUIS qr EM 180 Figure 103 Edit Custom Port Example sicisicecsarrsussnecastenecaaaeysuseaduueeueie E canesane deacesmendaunuslees 180 Figure 104 Firewall Example Edit Rule Destination Address sss 181 Figure 105 Firewall Example Edit Rule Select Customized Services eicere tnis 182 Figure 106 Firewall Example Rules MyService sentent anra trarre orta a sa dero 183 Figure TOT Firewall Anti Probing 2xcdeuisoi tke tret piae dar ee etd a Lc x bad d ni 185 Figure 108 Firewall Threshold 188 Figure TOS Coment Filer NWI sssrinin 191 Figure TIO Contem Filier Schedule er I stan 192 Figure 1
337. ntained in each packet header In this case only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Obtain an IP Select this if you get a dynamic IP address from your Internet Service Provider Address ISP A dynamic IP address is not fixed your ISP assigns you a different one Automatically each time you connect to the Internet This option is not available if you select RFC 1483 in the Encapsulation field Static IP Address Select this if your ISP gave you a fixed IP address Enter the IP address you were given in the IP Address field IP Address If your ISP gave you an IP address to use enter it here Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to the appendices to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting Gateway IP address Specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP Connection Nailed Up Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time Connection The P 660HWP Dx will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the
338. nteract with other devices such as the printer or with the Internet Your P 660HWP Dx is the AP Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is the name of the wireless network It stands for Service Set IDentity Iftwo wireless networks overlap they should use different channels Like radio stations or television channels each wireless network uses a specific channel or frequency to send and receive information P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 2 Wireless Network Setup If you want to access the Internet wirelessly you must have an Internet account setup already 7 2 1 Requirements To add a wireless LAN to your existing network make sure you have the following 1 an access point AP or a router with the wireless feature 2 at least one wireless network card adapter which varies according to your computer f you have a desktop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter f you have a laptop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card 3 a RADIUS server only if you want to use IEEE802 1x WPA or WPA2 To have two or m
339. ntered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time hh mm ss configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new time in this field and then click Apply New Date This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date yyyy mm dd configured manually When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this radio button to have the P 660HWP Dx get the time and date from the time server you specified below Time Protocol Select the time service protocol that your time server uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main difference between them is the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 The default NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 Time Server Address Enter the IP address or URL up to 20 extended English keyboard characters in length of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time Zone Setup Time Zone Choose the t
340. nternal SPTGEN text files conform to the following format lt field identification number field name parameter values allowed input gt where lt input gt is your input conforming to lt parameter values allowed gt The figure shown next is an example of an Internal SPTGEN text file Figure 184 Configuration Text File Format Column Descriptions Menu 1 General Setup 10000000 Configured 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000001 System Name Str Your Device 10000002 Location Str B 10000003 Contact Person s Name Str d 10000004 Route IP 0 No 1 Yes gt 1 10000005 Route IPX lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 10000006 Bridge 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix C Internal SPTGEN BS DO NOT alter or delete any field except parameters in the Input column This appendix introduces Internal SPTGEN All menus shown in this appendix are example menus meant to show SPTGEN usage Actual menus for your product may differ Internal SPTGEN File Modification Important Points to Remember Each parameter you enter must be preceded by one sign and one space Some parameters are dependent on others For example if you disable the Configured field in menu 1 see Figure 184 on page 35 then you disable every field in this menu If you enter a parameter that is invalid in the Input column the P 660HWP Dx will not save the configuration and th
341. ntinued LABEL DESCRIPTION Scheduler Select either Priority Based or Fairness Based from the drop down menu to control the traffic flow Select Priority Based to give preference to bandwidth classes with higher priorities Select Fairness Based to treat all bandwidth classes equally Max Select this check box to have the P 660HWP Dx divide up all of the interface s Bandwidth unallocated and or unused bandwidth among the bandwidth classes that require Usage bandwidth Do not select this if you want to reserve bandwidth for traffic that does not match a bandwidth class or you want to limit the speed of this interface see the Speed field description Apply Click Apply to save your settings to the P 6G0HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 9 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup You must use the Bandwidth Management Summary screen to enable bandwidth management on an interface before you can configure rules for that interface Click Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup to open the following screen Figure 131 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup Rule Setup Rule Setup Pl 2 Iv i j P i i 10 Direction LAN 7 Service Ww x Priority High 7 Bandwidth Add To LAN Interface Jactive Rule Name Destination Port Priority Bandwidth kbps Modify 1 F 0 10 EP Gu kbps WWW High Telnet 0 Mid 10 g A Apply Cancel The following table des
342. o Detection Failed STEB 1 STEP 72 ffi Internet Configuration Connection Type Note This wizard can only automatically detect PPP over Ethernet PPPoE PPP over ATM PPPoA or dynamically assigned Ethernet Internet connections Your Internet connection may use a Static IP address which cannot be detected automatically 3 2 1 Automatic Detection 1 Ifyou have a PPPoE or PPPoA connection a screen displays prompting you to enter your Internet account information Enter the username password and or service name exactly as provided 2 Click Next P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 37 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 24 Auto Detection PPPoE f Internet Configuration Auto Detected ISP Connection Type PPP r Ethernet PPPoE ISP Parameters for Internet Access Provider here If User Name Password Service Name optional 3 2 2 Manual Configuration 1 Ifthe P 660HWP Dx fails to detect your DSL connection type enter the Internet access information given to you by your ISP exactly in the wizard screen If not given leave the fields set to the default Figure 25 Internet Access Wizard Setup ISP Parameters f Internet Configuration ISP Parameters for Internet Access foll g tl r Interne i r may have orn e P 660HW
343. o establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy It should never be the only mechanism or method employed For a firewall to guard effectively you must design and deploy it appropriately This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information security policy In addition specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself Refer to Section 11 5 on page 50 to configure default firewall settings Refer to Section 11 6 on page 51 to view firewall rules Refer to Section 11 6 1 on page 53 to configure firewall rules Refer to Section 11 6 2 on page 56 to configure a custom service Refer to Section 11 10 3 on page 65 to configure firewall thresholds 10 2 Types of Firewalls There are three main types of firewalls Packet Filtering Firewalls Application level Firewalls Stateful Inspection Firewalls 10 2 1 Packet Filtering Firewalls Packet filtering firewalls restrict access based on the source destination computer network address of a packet and the type of application P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 10 Firewalls 10 2 2 Application level Firewalls Application level firewalls restrict access by serving as proxies for external servers Since they use programs written for specific Internet services such as HTTP FTP and telnet they can evaluate network packets for valid application specific data Application level gateways have a number of general advantages
344. o not assign a Default Server IP address the P 660HWP Dx discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Click Network gt NAT gt Port Forwarding to open the following screen See Table 50 on page 40 for port numbers commonly used for particular services P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT Figure 88 NAT Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Default Server Setup Vv Default Server Port Forwarding Service Name Ww Fe Active Service Name start Port end Por serverIP Address Nodify_ 1 WWW 80 80 BEPOW o o 0 0 Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Add 172 23 15 23 Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 51 NAT Port Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Server Setup Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the P 660HWP Dx discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Port Forwarding Service Name Select a service from the drop down list box Server IP Enter the IP address of the server for the specified service Address Add Click this button to add a rule to the table b
345. o provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks Select Short preamble if you are sure the wireless adapters support it and to provide more efficient communications Select Dynamic to have the P 660HWP Dx automatically use short preamble when wireless adapters support it otherwise the P G60HWP Dx uses long preamble 802 11 Mode Select 802 11b Only to allow only IEEE 802 11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 660HWP Dx Select 802 11g Only to allow only IEEE 802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 660HWP Dx Select Mixed to allow either IEEE802 11b or IEEE802 11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the P 660HWP Dx The transmission rate of your P 660HWP Dx might be reduced Enable 802 11g mode Select this option to enable Turbo and Super G modes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 37 Wireless LAN Advanced continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Frame Enable Maximum Frame Burst to help eliminate collisions in mixed mode Burst networks networks with both IEEE 802 11g and IEEE 802 11b traffic and enhance the performance of both pure IEEE 802 11g and mixed IEEE 802 11b g networks Maximum Frame Burst sets the maximum time in micro seconds that the ZP 660HWP Dx transmits IEEE 802 119 wireless traffic only Type the maximum frame burst between 0 and 1800 650 1000 or 1800 recommended Enter 0 to disable this feature Bac
346. o the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components ai NetMeeting 3 Phone Dialer 0 2 MB CJ Universal Plug and Play 0 4 MB 9 Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 866 3 MB r Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details Cancel 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted 18 3 2 Installing UPnP in Windows XP Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Inthe Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 148 Network Connections Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools BESISEXSSM Help Operator Assisted Dialing Dial up Preferences Network Identification Bridge Connections Advanced Settings rking Components a ate A n T 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components se
347. oduction to ZyXEL s Firewall The P 660HWP Dx firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated The P 660HWP Dx s purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network LAN to be securely connected to the Internet The P 660HWP Dx can be used to prevent theft destruction and modification of data as well as log events which may be important to the security of your network The P 660HWP Dx also has packet filtering capabilities The P 660HWP Dx is installed between the LAN and the Internet This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN The P 660HWP Dx has one DSL ISDN port and one Ethernet LAN port which physically separate the network into two areas The DSL ISDN port connects to the Internet The LAN Local Area Network port attaches to a network of computers which needs security from the outside world These computers will have access to Internet services such as e mail FTP and the World Wide Web However inbound access will not be allowed unless you configure remote management or create a firewall rule to allow a remote host to use a specific service P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 10 Firewalls 10 3 1 Denial of Service Attacks Figure 92 Firewall Application e E E E F r E imn H 10 4 Denial of Service Denials of Service DoS attacks are aimed at devices
348. of your powerline network and for expert troubleshooting Click on Network gt Powerline gt Status to access advanced information on the status of your powerline network Figure 83 Network gt Powerline gt Status Remote Setting Jae General CCo Information Mac Address 00 13 49 d1 cb 10 TEI 1 NID b f2e695666b13 SNID Local Station Information Mac Address 00 13 49 d1 cb 10 CCo mode Auto TEI 1 MAC Firmware Version INT6000 MA4C 1 4 1444 556 20061108 FINAL B Topology In Local Network Fre station HAC Address Bridged NAC Address 0 0 D Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network Powerline Status LABEL DESCRIPTION General This section provides general information on your network useful for technical troubleshooting CCo Information CCo refers to Central Coordinator The Central Coordinator of the powerline network is the powerline adapter which keeps track of which devices are part of the network as well as synchronizes communication within the powerline network The powerline adapters in your powerline network automatically select the Central Coordinator MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the adapter which is the Central Coordinator of the powerline network The MAC address of your powerline adapter can be found by looking at the label on your device It consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters hexadecimal charac
349. ogs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded lt Packet Direction gt according to the default policy s setting Firewall rule NOT match TCP Attempted TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF access UDP IGMP ESP GRE OSPF matched or did not match a configured firewall rule Packet Direction lt rule d gt denoted by its number and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule 40 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 113 Access Control Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Triangle route packet forwarded The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass TCP UDP IGMP ESP GRE _ through OSPF Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked TCP UDP IGMP ESP corresponding NAT table entry GRE OSPF message TCP Router sent blocked web site The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested Table 114 TCP Reset Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Under SYN flood attack sent TCP RST The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack the TCP incomplete count is per destination host Exceed TCP MAX incomplete sent TCP
350. ommands Table 168 Firewall Commands FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION Firewall SetUp config edit firewall active lt yes no gt This command turns the firewall on or off config retrieve firewall This command returns the previously saved firewall settings config save firewall This command saves the current firewall settings Display config display firewall This command shows the of all the firewall settings including e mail attack and the sets rules config display firewall set lt set gt This command shows the current configuration of a set including timeout values name default permit and etc If you don t put use a number after set information about all of the sets rules appears config display firewall set set 4 rule rule gt This command shows the current entries of a rule in a firewall rule set config display firewall attack This command shows all of the attack response settings config display firewall e mail This command shows all of the e mail settings config display firewall This command shows all of the available firewall sub commands P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix G Firewall Commands Table 168 Firewall Commands continued mail server lt ip address of mail server gt FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION Edit E mail config edit firewall e mail This co
351. on so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP access point to reduce interference Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance Adjacent channels partially overlap however To avoid interference due to overlap your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using For example if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1 then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11 RTS CTS A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point but are not within range of each other The following figure illustrates a hidden node Both stations STA are within range of the access point AP or wireless gateway but out of range of each other so they cannot hear each other that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used Therefore they are considered hidden from each other P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs BS Figure 181 RTS CTS RTS Range CTS Range it ath O nn om pent RR ARI ER RR je ma aene P Maa Station AP me H iia k i H Data E Mr Pi Ce r m DC Ke EH NR Stations A and B do not FN 7 pee Station A gt hear each other They Station B m xm wm can hear the AP When station A sends data to the AP it might not know that the station B is al
352. on 1 0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03 22 12 2000 User 192 168 1 1 none 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp get rom t ftp bye C Nedit rom t edit the rom t text file by a text editor and save it LES You can rename your rom t file when you save it to your computer but it must ben amed rom t when you upload it to your P 660HWP Dx Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example 1 2 3 4 Launch your FTP application Enter bin The command bin sets the transfer mode to binary Upload your rom t file from your computer to the P 660HWP Dx using the put command computer to the P 660HWP Dx Exit this FTP application Figure 188 Internal SPTGEN FTP Upload Example QrNf 220 User 331 Pass 230 ftp 200 ftp ftp tp 192 168 1 1 PPP FTP version 1 0 ready at Sat Jan 1 03 22 12 2000 192 168 1 1 none Enter PASS command word Logged in bin Type I OK put rom t bye P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Example Internal SPTGEN Menus This section provides example Internal SPTGEN menus Table 143 Abbre viations Used in the Example Internal SPTGEN Screens Table ABBREVIATION MEANING FIN Field Identification Number FN Field Name PVA Parameter Values Allowed INPUT An example of what you may enter Applies to the P 660HWP Dx Table 144 Menu 1 Ge
353. on as the log is full Selecting many alert and or log categories especially Access Control may result in many e mails being sent P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Figure 163 Log Settings Log Settings E mail Log Settings Mail Server ee SMTP Server Name or IP Mail Subject Send Log to E Mail Address Send Alerts to E Mail Address I Enable SMTP Authentication User Name i Password hnol Log Schedule Wen Log is Fu Day for Sending Log Y Time for Sending Log hour minute Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging Active Syslog Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Server Name or IP Address Log Facility Leca1 x Active Log and Alert Log Send Immediate Alert Vv System Maintenance Vv System Errors Iv System Errors M Access Control M Access Control Iv Blocked Web Sites M UPnP Iv attacks M Forward Web Sites Iv Blocked Web Sites Iv Attacks Iv Any IP M 802 1x Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 110 Log Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION E mail Log Settings Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via E mail Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e mail mess
354. on failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer s Local Remote Addresses don t match Verifying Local ID failed The connection failed during IKE phase 2 because the router and the peer s Local Remote Addresses don t match IKE Packet Retransmit The router retransmitted the last packet sent because there was no response from the peer Failed to send IKE Packet An Ethernet error stopped the router from sending IKE packets Too many errors Deleting SA An SA was deleted because there were too many errors Phase 1 IKE SA process done The phase 1 IKE SA process has been completed Duplicate requests with the same cookie The router received multiple requests from the same peer while still processing the first IKE packet from the peer IKE Negotiation is in process The router has already started negotiating with the peer for the connection but the IKE process has not finished yet No proposal chosen Phase 1 or phase 2 parameters don t match Please check all protocols settings Ex One device being configured for 3DES and the other being configured for DES causes the connection to fail Local remote IPs of incoming request conflict with rule lt d gt The security gateway is set to 0 0 0 0 and the router used the peer s Local Address as the router s Remote Address This information conflicted with static rule d thus the connec
355. on only if your wireless clients support WPA See Section 3 3 1 on page 46 for more information Select Manually assign a WEP key to configure a WEP Key See Section 3 3 2 on page 46 for more information Select Disable wireless security to have no wireless LAN security configured and your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Note If you enable OTIST in the previous wizard screen but select Disable wireless security here the P G60HWP Dx still creates a pre shared key WPA PSK automatically If you enable OTIST and select Manually assign a WEP key the P 660HWP Dx will replace the WEP key with a WPA PSK Back Click Back to display the previous screen Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access ex The wireless stations and P 660HWP Dx must use the same SSID channel ID and WEP encryption key if WEP is enabled WPA PSK if WPA PSK is enabled for wireless communication 4 This screen varies depending on the security mode you selected in the previous screen Fill in the field if available and click Next 3 3 1 Manually assign a WPA PSK key Choose Manually assign a WPA PSK key in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre Shared Key Figure 35 Manually assign a WPA key fa Wireless LAN Pre Shared Key 1234
356. only Neither Disable BES When you choose WAN only or LAN amp WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Access Status field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The P 660HWP Dx automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration 17 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the P 660HWP Dx will disconnect the session immediately There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time There is a firewall rule that blocks it 17 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Use the P 660HWP Dx s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the P 660HWP Dx s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 17 1 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle ti
357. onse packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the P 660HWP Dx exists The P 660HWP Dx supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your P 660HWP Dx when unsupported ports are probed Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Refer to Section 10 1 on page 35 for more information Click Security gt Firewall gt Anti Probing to display the screen as shown Figure 107 Firewall Anti Probing Anti Probing Anti Probing Respond to PING on LAN amp WAN 7 Do Not Respond to Requests for Unauthorized Services Apply Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Firewall Anti Probing LABEL DESCRIPTION Respond to PING The P 660HWP Dx does not respond to any incoming Ping requests when on Disable is selected Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests Otherwise select LAN amp WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests Do Not Respond Select this option to prevent hacke
358. oportion to the video image s changing dynamics P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The VBR nRT non real time Variable Bit Rate type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation It is commonly used for bursty traffic typical on LANs PCR and MBS define the burst levels SCR defines the minimum level An example of an VBR nRT connection would be non time sensitive data file transfers 5 3 1 3 Unspecified Bit Rate UBR The Unspecified Bit Rate UBR ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers However UBR doesn t guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth An example application is background file transfer 5 4 Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you turn on and connect the P 660HWP Dx to a telephone jack it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information such as an Internet account user name and password is required or the P 660HWP Dx cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Zero configuration for Internet access is disable when the P 660HWP Dx is in bridge mode you set the P 660HWP Dx to use a static fixed WAN IP address 5 5 Internet Connection To change your P
359. or public deployment a simple user name and password pair is more practical The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types Table 141 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP MD5 EAP TLS EAP TTLS PEAP LEAP Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Certificate Client No Yes Optional Optional No Certificate Server No Yes Yes Yes No Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No WPA and WPA2 Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a subset of the IEEE 802 111 standard WPA2 IEEE 802 111 is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption authentication and key management than WPA Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server use WPA2 for stronger data encryption If you don t have an external RADIUS server you should use WPA2 PSK WPA2 Pre Shared Key that only requires a single identical password entered into each access point wireless gateway and wireless client As long as the passwords match a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2 just use WPA or WPA PSK depending on whether you h
360. ore computers communicate with each other wirelessly without an AP or wireless router make sure you have the following 1 two or more wireless network cards adapters which vary according to your computers f you have a desktop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter f you have a laptop use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card 7 2 2 Setup Information To set up your wireless network using an AP or wireless router make sure your AP or wireless router and wireless network card s adapter s use the same following settings SSID Channel auto or Network type of a wireless network card adapter Infrastructure wireless standard IEEE 802 11b g b g or a Security None WEP 64bit 128bit or 256bit key ASCII or Hex IEEE 802 1x WPA PSK TKIP or AES WPA TKIP or AES P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN WPA2 PSK TKIP or AES WPA2 TKIP or AES Preamble type if available auto short or long To set up your wireless network without an AP or wireless router make sure wireless network cards adapters use the same following settings Network type Ad Hoc SSID Channel wireless standard IEEE 802 11b g b g or a Security None WEP 64bit 128bit or 256bit key ASCII or Hex 7 3 Wireless Security Overview The following sections introduce different types of wireless securit
361. ort Start 0 150000020 SUA Server 5 Port End 0 150000021 SUA Server 5 Local IP address 0 150000022 SUA Server 6 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 0 50000023 SUA Server 6 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000024 SUA Server 6 Port Start 0 150000025 SUA Server 6 Port End 0 150000026 SUA Server 6 Local IP address 0 150000027 SUA Server 7 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000028 SUA Server 7 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000029 SUA Server 7 Port Start 0 150000030 SUA Server 7 Port End 0 150000031 SUA Server 7 Local IP address 0 150000032 SUA Server 8 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 150000033 SUA Server 8 Protocol X0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000034 SUA Server 8 Port Start 0 150000035 SUA Server 8 Port End 0 150000036 SUA Server 8 Local IP address 0 150000037 SUA Server 9 Active O No 1 Yes gt 0 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix C Internal SPTGEN Table 148 Menu 15 SUA Server Setup continued 150000038 SUA Server 9 Protocol lt 0 All 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000039 SUA Server 9 Port Start 0 150000040 SUA Server 9 Port End 0 150000041 SUA Server 9 Local IP add
362. ot valid Certificate signature was not verified correctly Certificate was revoked by a CRL Certificate was not added to the cache WO O nvNA an om wy nh Fr Certificate decoding failed Certificate was not found anywhere Certificate chain looped did not find trusted root Certificate contains critical extension that was not handled Certificate issuer was not valid CA specific information missing Not used CRL is too old CRL is not valid CRL signature was not verified correctly oO an oT Ww nh rI o CRL was not found anywhere Ne CRL was not added to the cache N Oo CRL decoding failed N mn CRL is not currently valid but in the future N N CRL contains duplicate serial numbers N Co Time interval is not continuous N A Time information not available N U Database method failed due to timeout N Oo Database method failed N NJ Path was not verified N Maximum path length reached Table 126 ACL Setting Notes PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION DESCRIPTION L to W LAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN W to L WAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN L to L LAN to LAN P ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or 660HWP Dx the P 660HWP Dx W to W
363. other outlets in your home and connecting other computers or network devices for example a printer to them P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 8 Powerline In this User s Guide the electrical wiring network may be referred to as the powerline network 8 2 Privacy and Powerline Adapters When the P 660HWP Dx communicates with each other HomePlug AV compliant powerline adapters they use encryption to scramble the information that 1s sent in the powerline network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The HomePlug AV standard uses 128 bit AES Advanced Encryption Standard to safely transmit data between powerline adapters For the P 660HWP Dx and powerline adapters to communicate with each other they all need to use the same Network Membership Key NMK Otherwise they cannot unscramble the encrypted data sent in the powerline network The NMK is derived from the network password you assign to the P 560HWP Dx and powerline adapters By default all HomePlug AV powerline adapters are configured with the network password HomePlugAV This allows all HomePlug AV powerline adapters and the P 660HWP Dx to communicate with each other without any software configuration This also means that 1f you don t change the network password any HomePlug AV powerline adapter connected to your powerline circuit can see your network data LES Change the network password on
364. ou must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the P 660HWP Dx s new settings Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool Channel Set the operating frequency channel depending on your particular region Selection Select a channel from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen 7 4 1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless clients to communicate with the access points without any data encryption P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN LES If you do not enable any wireless security on your P 660HWP Dx your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range Figure 63 Wireless No Security Wireless Setup M Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz Security Security Mode No Security Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Wireless No Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Secur
365. our Prestige s MAC address that will be specific to this device Replace Factory Default Certificate My Certificate Setting T D1 Factory D1 Factory 2000 Jan ist 2030 Jan ist 1 auto genereted self signad cart SELF Default Default 00 00 00 GMT 00 00 00 cT amp Certificate Certificate Type subject issuer valid From valid To Modify CN P 660HWP CN P 660HWP Create Import Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage This bar displays the percentage of the P 560HWP Dx s PKI storage space that is Space in Use currently in use When the storage space is almost full you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates Replace This button displays when the P 660HWP Dx has the factory default certificate The factory default certificate is common to all P GG0HWP Dxs that use certificates ZyXEL recommends that you use this button to replace the factory default certificate with one that uses your P 660HWP Dx s MAC address My certificate Setting This field displays the certificate index number The certificates are listed in alphabetical order Name This field displays the name used to identify this certificate It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name Type This field displays what kind of certificate this i
366. our telephone to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions The use of a telephone microfilter is optional 1 Locate and disconnect each telephone 2 Connect a cable from the wall jack to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure 4 After you are done make sure that your telephone works If your telephone does not work disconnect the microfilter and contact either your local telephone company or the provider of the microfilter P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx Figure 5 Connecting a Microfilter Wall Jack Microfilter Wall Side Phone Side You can also use a Y Connector with a microfilter in order to connect both your modem and a telephone to the same wall jack without using a POTS splitter 1 Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y Connector 2 Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the P 660HWP Dx 4 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure Figure 6 Connecting a Microfilter and Y Connector Y Connector Phone Side 1 5 3 P 660HWP Dx With ISDN This section relates to people who use their P 660HWP Dx with A
367. oved voice quality High Typically used for video traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be prioritized over other data traffic Mid Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities Use mid priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency but is affected by long delays such as Internet surfing Low This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers and print jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Use low priority for applications that do not have strict latency and throughput requirements P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 7 3 Services The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Next to the name of the service two fields appear in brackets The first field indicates the IP protocol type TCP UDP or ICMP The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type For example look at the DNS service UDP TCP 53 means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 53 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 41 Commonly Used Services SERVICE DESCRIPTION AIM New ICQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentica
368. over the default mode of permitting application traffic directly to internal hosts Information hiding prevents the names of internal systems from being made known via DNS to outside systems since the application gateway is the only host whose name must be made known to outside systems Robust authentication and logging pre authenticates application traffic before it reaches internal hosts and causes it to be logged more effectively than if it were logged with standard host logging Filtering rules at the packet filtering router can be less complex than they would be if the router needed to filter application traffic and direct it to a number of specific systems The router need only allow application traffic destined for the application gateway and reject the rest 10 2 3 Stateful Inspection Firewalls Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol They also inspect the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency however they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support See Section 10 5 on page 40 for more information on stateful inspection Firewalls of one type or another have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises 10 3 Intr
369. ow reboot As there will be no indication of when the process is complete please wait for one minute before attempting to access the router again The P 660HWP Dx automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Figure 171 Temporarily Disconnected Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default P 660HWP Dx IP address 192 168 1 1 See the appendix for details on how to set up your computer s IP address If the upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen Figure 172 Configuration Restore Error System Restore Restore configuration error The configuration file was not accepted by the device Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file Click Help for more information Return 21 2 3 Back to Factory Defaults Pressing the RESET button in this section clears all user entered configuration information and returns the P 660HWP Dx to its factory defaults You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your P 660HWP Dx Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for
370. p Behavior Jer or o ERRPREVIAREEERISPRTAM SCHEME S SEE ERI asia vaccines 230 1S 10 2 Rule Configuration 231 TaN Bandwidth MONIO acceissdtesas cass pae eeu ada phoa iva E EE ED BEMEE II qin E EAIA aAA ni ER aa 234 Chapter 16 BEIDE IET Gg P 235 10 1 Dynami DNS OVGIMiOW A M 235 16 1 1 DY NDING Wildede anes TAS SURFER ERI IS IH RSS d RSS bead 235 15 2 C onnounng Dynamic DNS amp ussiesiekuct uu E FERREA PRIUS aRRRbeR A 235 Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration eee eee eeeeseeeeeeeeaeneeneeaeeeeeeeeees 239 17 1 Remote Management Overview 0 cccccccceecceeeeseenceeaeceeceeeeeeeeesedsesaeaaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeea 239 17 1 1 Remote Management Limitations uiuere rct naiaiaee ieaiai aaa 240 17 1 2 Remote Management and NAD ssssinssrisrsisssiisinnsnisisaoss isorinis isan iiaa 240 TELS o MIDI 240 usd c e mee M 240 Tid WEG 241 jure ios ise MID RR TUE RV TITRES 242 TIS C ODHQUIMEQ TE EI aocuredoxpsceus QD uai ENTIER pex cH ererurrener a 242 TT 8 SN MB 2 Li uooiteoher i ioi REO i er b RD COR COR t RO o E p eas 243 1706 1 Supported MIBS iuezexpetedueivesedssceb aa FERA a GU NOR EX LE a bac Pin Fete aaa 244 176 2 SNMP PADS Re E 245 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Table of Contents Te Boo COPED SIDA niea 245 ugs a PISS Pc
371. p Setup The screen appears as shown P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Figure 52 WAN Backup Setup WAN Backup Setup WAN Backup Setup Backup Type DSL Link Check WAN IP Address 1 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address 2 nono Check WAN IP Address 3 ooo Fail Tolerance o Recovery Interval D sec Timeout o sec Traffic Redirect Active Traffic Redirect Metric 1s Backup Gateway 0 0 0 0 Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 WAN Backup Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Backup Setup Backup Type Select the method that the P G60HWP Dx uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the P 660HWP Dx check if the connection to the DSLAM is up Select ICMP to have the P 660HWP Dx periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Check WAN IP Configure this field to test your P 660HWP Dx s WAN accessibility Type the IP Address1 3 address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address Note If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup you must configure at least one IP address here When using a WAN backup connection the P 660HWP Dx periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response Fail Tolerance Type the number of times 2 recommended that your P 660HWP Dx may ping th
372. period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires default five minutes Simply log back into the P 660HWP Dx if this happens P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 3 Resetting the P 660HWP Dx If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the P 660HWP Dx to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 2 3 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on not blinking 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it When the POWER LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the P 660HWP Dx restarts 2 4 Navigating the Web Configurator 2 4 1 Navigation Panel After you enter the admin password use the sub menus on the navigation panel to configure P 660HWP Dx features The following table describes the sub menus Figure 12 Web Configurator Main Screen ZyXEL gt Status rS Refresh Interval None SA A S status Click the logout icon any time to Host Name System Upti it th b fi t Model Number P 660HWP D1 Current Dati exi e web con igura or MAC Address 00 13 49 00 00 01 System Mode ocd ZyNOS Firmware Version AMAL ee onii CPU Usage E 5 94 000
373. plication Example ssssssssssssseseeneeeerene ene em nmn nennen nnne nens 36 Figure 3 Front Panel e 38 Figure 4s Connecing a POTS AUD aacsicosxesas vette vendcexesianiadsdaensnonsastelanmesdee ELA I AA EL o8 39 Figure o Comnecing a Wil esl cadere 40 Figure 6 Connecting a Microfilter and Y Conneotor i cernit reset a nuit tn auus situ dean ad dde 40 Figure 7 P GG0HAWP Dx with ISDN uiscera prx ee YER a RR ERR ae E pan Kp KR PA RR ER X B ERR aay 41 abcd da o o e oiee TET 44 Fawet User S SCOE a iea a SNEEN 44 Figure 10 Change Password at LOIN uuo descen tma deben inn eei e Rp nia ENAA in ben PA duke Erb EEA UA rad 45 Figure TI Selecta Mode ew v M 45 Figure 12 Web Configurator Main SCIES cas cce id ptt ar x AREE dero t nad ni mse RR 46 sf WES t get es fo Mer 49 Figure 14 Status MI 51 Figure 19 Status WLAN SINUS 1 aa cainecnen seu nawraaaineacarenconpaadeda KEEA E RP Cit E PO A A EEEREN DA EE CIR EASES 52 Figure 1C ote ters IE Jem 53 xo cEE cs 40 ae ere eet ere Pr ereerrre treme ere Pe Terr Pete rer Pree rye Terrie Pea Ter pret erst r ere ret tert ree 53 Figure 18 Status Packet Statistics 1o Docet etat Enna bo da ER EA RR tit ERR a RR daa Viola LN PA d deme 54 Figure 19 System General Pe 8 55 Powe ZU et eG M
374. pplication Priority Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving your changes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Powerline This chapter introduces the main applications and management of the powerline feature 8 1 Overview The P 660HWP Dx is a HomePlug AV adaptor integrated DSL product The P 660HWP Dx and other HomePlug AV powerline adapters in your network communicate with each other by sending and receiving information over your home s electrical wiring The P 660HWP Dx plugs into an ordinary outlet to create a new network which can extend to any other electrical outlet in any room of a house The following section shows you a typical application Figure 78 Expand Your Network ee DS L Internet Y 45 SSSI 1 Connect your P 660HWP Dx to the Internet 2 Then plug your P 660HWP Dx into a power outlet and turn it on The P 660HWP Dx is ready for connection on a powerline network 3 Connect another HomePlug AV compatible adapter to a computer and then plug it in on the same home or office wiring After configuring the settings on all adapters see Section 8 3 on page 38 and Section 8 4 on page 39 your computer can now connect to the powerline network and to the Internet Your powerline network can be further expanded by plugging additional powerline adapters into
375. priority among the routes the P 660HWP Dx uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The P 660HWP Dx automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the P 560HWP Dx s Internet connection terminates Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup 52 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide LAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 6 1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses See Section 6 3 on page 40 to configure the LAN screens 6 1 1 LANs WANs and the P 660HWP Dx The actual physical connection determines whether the P 660HWP Dx ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate
376. r 246 17 6 Conigurnng ICMP e E 247 e TE O a EP 248 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPEP LL idi aii sanisescaincdatendinientanvncadensdteiiadadiaiasusdatiaaniavatiataahinan 251 18 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play 1 ceseuoie eio aper top ut aer ke EDU INS ck pasta EE EH pU tRE rit RD tcd ak k Rn ER 251 19 1 1 How dol know if musiga UPIP 1i en RR RAF RE AL doa a 251 Pe URI TEOSA te hers hdres 251 19 1 3 Cautions wih UPAP sccccc consctescrssiuctcesisceseccacnsesseccenisesiteamncseste taesauuerened saureenesauarien 251 Ta UPAR A AEL nA 252 TAT C ails 0 Ly gle ed od a eee 252 18 3 Installing UPnP in Windows EXOITIDIG 12i scieienssews adotta dena cora td ey rtr ported der poda 253 18 3 1 Installing UPnP in Windows Bees diu e rat ada pi dada 253 18 3 2 inetaling Un eov HOO AP sscan prive nup Ep exi rra Pr kr ER AREK EFE IU o RR rE NR EE HEUR 254 18 4 Using UPnP in Windows AP EXSplg i eiit nri Le YRRHE iin snrnid ie RR dde 255 18 4 1 Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device sseee 256 16 4 2 Web Configurator Easy ACCESS saniiesicanedsousciasns xad br Feb FEED Pes OG RE REA E CET GERA ANE sauce 259 Part VI Maintenance and Troubleshooting 263 Chapter 19 o roli Pee ec Renee er ee ee renee ee eee ern ere ere mercer Sern ern ee rere eee Teer 265 TO C nr spe 265 19 1 1 General Setup and System Na
377. r One to One and Many to Many No Overload NAT mapping types e e P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT The following table summarizes these types Table 48 NAT Mapping Types TYPE IP MAPPING One to One ILA1 amp IGA1 Many to One SUA PAT ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 amp 2 IGA1 Many to Many Overload ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 Many to Many No Overload ILA1 amp IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 gt IGA3 Server Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 9 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server The P 660HWP Dx also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 48 on page 38 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your P 660HWP Dx Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your P 660HWP Dx 9 3 SIP ALG Some applications such as SIP cannot operate through NAT are NAT un friendly because they embed IP addresses and port numbers in their packets data payload Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway ALG An Application Layer Gateway ALG manages a specific protocol such as SIP
378. r a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 9 5 1 Default Server IP Address BS In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen If you do not assign a Default Server IP address the P 660HWP Dx discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup 9 5 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server s on your local network The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port nu
379. r line network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK ICON SUB LINK FUNCTION NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT Port Forwarding Use this screen to configure servers behind the P 660HWP Dx Security Firewall General Use this screen to activate deactivate the firewall and the direction of network traffic to which to apply the rule Rules This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules and allows you to edit add a firewall rule Anti Probing Use this screen to change your anti probing settings Threshold Use this screen to configure the threshold for DoS attacks Content Filter Keyword Use this screen to block sites containing certain keywords in the URL Schedule Use this screen to set the days and times for the P 660HWP Dx to perform content filtering Trusted Use this screen to exclude a range of users on the LAN from content filtering on your P 860HWP Dx Certificates My Certificates Trusted CA s Trusted Remote Hosts Directory Servers Advanced Static Route Static Route Use this screen to configure IP static routes Bandwidth Summary Use this screen to enable bandwidth management on an MGMT interface Rule Setup Use this screen to define a bandwidth rule Monitor Use this screen to view the P 660HWP Dx s bandwidth
380. rates how stateful inspection works User A can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN and responses to this request are allowed However other Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked 10 5 1 Stateful Inspection Process In this example the following sequence of events occurs when a TCP packet leaves the LAN network through the firewall s WAN interface The TCP packet is the first in a session and the packet s application layer protocol is configured for a firewall rule inspection 1 The packet travels from the firewall s LAN to the WAN 2 The packet is evaluated against the interface s existing outbound access list and the packet is permitted a denied packet would simply be dropped at this point 3 The packet is inspected by a firewall rule to determine and record information about the state of the packet s connection This information is recorded in a new state table entry created for the new connection If there is not a firewall rule for this packet and it is not an attack then the settings in the Firewall General screen determine the action for this packet 4 Based on the obtained state information a firewall rule creates a temporary access list entry that is inserted at the beginning of the WAN interface s inbound extended access list This temporary access list entry is designed to permit inbound packets of the same connection as the outbound packet just inspected 5 The outbound packet is forwarded out through the int
381. rator 43 46 165 166 171 screen summary 47 WEP 117 encryption 119 Wide Area Network see WAN Wi Fi Multimedia QoS 128 Wi Fi Protected Access 319 wireless client 111 wireless client WPA supplicants 321 wireless LAN 115 wireless network 111 basic guidelines 111 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index wireless networks channel 111 encryption 114 MAC address filter 113 security 112 SSID 111 wireless security 112 315 wizard icon 59 WLAN interference 313 security parameters 322 world wide web 240 WPA 319 key caching 320 pre authentication 320 user authentication 320 vs WPA PSK 320 wireless client supplicant 321 with RADIUS application example 321 WPA compatibility 115 WPA2 319 user authentication 320 vs WPA2 PSK 320 wireless client supplicant 321 with RADIUS application example 321 WPA2 Pre Shared Key 319 WPA2 PSK 319 320 application example 321 WPA PSK 319 320 application example 321 WWW 133 Z zero configuration Internet access 86 ZyXEL s firewall introduction 158 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index P 660HWP Dx User s Guide
382. ready using the channel If these two stations send data at the same time collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time resulting in a loss of messages for both stations RTS CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes An RTS CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake is invoked When a data frame exceeds the RTS CTS value you set between 0 to 2432 bytes the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS Request To Send message to the AP for permission to send it The AP then responds with a CTS Clear to Send message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS CTS directly to the AP without the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake You should only configure RTS CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the cost of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake Ifthe RTS CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value see next then the RTS Request To Send CTS Clear to Send handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS CTS size
383. reen Click Return and check your information in the My Certificate Create screen Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the P 660HWP Dx to enroll a certificate online 13 8 My Certificates gt Import Click Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates and then Import to open the My Certificate Import screen Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate from a computer to the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates You can only import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the P 660HWP Dx the certification request contains the private key The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen One exception is that you can import a PKCS 12 format certificate without a corresponding certification request since the certificate includes the private key You must remove any spaces from the certificate s filename before you can import it 13 8 1 Certificate File Formats The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats Binary X 509 This is an ITU T recommendation that defines the formats for X 509 certificates PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X 509 certificate into a
384. reless settings in this screen Click Next 44 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 34 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 fa Wireless LAN Network Name SSID ZyXEL k a name You will search for this name from you Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz channels You should use the default channel unless other ame channel Manually assign a WPA PSK key vould prefer to create your own key WPA is stronger than WEP but not all lt Back Next gt exit The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable 7 bit English keyboard characters for the SSID wireless LAN If you change this field on the P 660HWP Dx make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network Channel The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802 11b g wireless devices is called a Selection channel Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device Security Select Automatically assign a WPA key Recommended to have the P 660HWP Dx create a pre shared key WPA PSK automatically only if your wireless clients support WPA and OTIST This option is available only when you enable OTIST in the previous wizard screen Select Manually assign a WPA PSK key to configure a pre shared key WPA PSK Choose this opti
385. res 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter JEEE 802 11b or 802 11g operation of this product in the U S A is firmware limited to channels 1 through 11 To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons TEX AKI KDR BY A PETER m BERE STR REAR ORS ZR JERE XH RSS EK HH KANE A EAR A S CBE E ste TPE ROE PHR EDR EE ZA I eR ER AR Sas REET APHIS EZISH gt ie 28 TET HEIEEUT HERES 9 APR ata TERE a RIE FS CA f BR Re iA as B L3 EPER S BA Ea PRG T E pra AREE HERE US SB LAS SP CT BED EET ENE WWD TERRA E
386. ress 0 0 0 0 150000042 SUA Server 10 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt zug 150000043 SUA Server 410 Protocol 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP 150000044 SUA Server 10 Port Start 0 150000045 SUA Server 10 Port End 0 150000046 SUA Server 10 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 150000047 SUA Server 11 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000048 SUA Server 11 Protocol lt 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 150000049 SUA Server 11 Port Start 0 150000050 SUA Server 11 Port End 0 150000051 SUA Server 11 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 150000052 SUA Server 12 Active 0 No 1 Yes gt 0 150000053 SUA Server 12 Protocol 0 A11 6 TCP 17 U 0 DP gt 50000054 SUA Server 12 Port Start 0 150000055 SUA Server 12 Port End 0 150000056 SUA Server 12 Local IP address 0 0 0 0 Table 149 Menu 21 1 Filter Set 1 Menu 21 Filter set 1 FI EN PVA INPUT 210100001 Filter Set 1 Name Str Menu 21 1 1 1 set 1 rule 1 FI EN PVA INPUT 210101001 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Type 2 TCP IP MS 210101002 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Active lt 0 No 1 Yes gt ed 210101003 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Protocol 6 210101004 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest IP address 0 0 0 0 210101005 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Subnet 0 Mask 210101006 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Port 137 210101007 IP Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Dest Port Comp lt 0 none 1 equal 1 2 not equal 3 less 4 greater gt 210101008
387. rmines the identity of the users Authorization P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix B Wireless LANs Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network Accounting Keeps track of the client s network activity RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication Access Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication Access Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access Access Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access Access Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access Request message The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting Accounting Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting Accounting Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting In order to ensure network security the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key which is a password they both know The key is not sent over the network In addition to the shared key password in
388. rn on your P 660HWP Dx and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 201 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Captu About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software Se System Preferences Ti gt Location gt 2 Click Network in the icon bar Select Automatic from the Location list Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 202 Macintosh OS X Network eo Network T Lal t wo J Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic m Show Built in Ethernet B PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Configure Using DHCP i Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes Apply Now 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the
389. rowse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Back Click Back to go the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates 13 9 Trusted CAs Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs to open the Trusted CAs screen This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the P 660HWP Dx to accept as trusted The P 660HWP Dx accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities Figure 118 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs Trusted CAs oon ee PKI Storage Space in Use 3 odii 100 Trusted CA Setting a Neme subiect issuer vatidrrom validato nois Modify Import Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs LABEL DESCRIPTION PKI Storage Space in Use This bar displays the percentage of the P 660HWP Dx s PKI storage space that is currently in use When the storage space is almost full you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates Trusted CAs Setting
390. rs from finding the P 660HWP Dx by probing to Requests for for unused ports If you select this option the P 660HWP Dx will not respond to Unauthorized port request s for unused ports thus leaving the unused ports and the P Services 660HWP Dx unseen By default this option is not selected and the P 660HWP Dx will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports Note that the probing packets must first traverse the P 660HWP Dx s firewall mechanism before reaching this anti probing mechanism Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet the P 660HWP Dx reacts based on the corresponding firewall policy to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet or an ICMP port unreachable packet for a blocked UDP packets or just drop the packets without sending a response packet Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 10 DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks the P 660HWP Dx uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established These thresholds apply globally to all sessions You can use the default threshold values or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements Refer to Section 11 10 3 on page 65 to configure thresholds 11 10 1 Threshold Values Tune these parameters whe
391. rt Click Start to encrypt the wireless security data using the setup key and have the P 660HWP Dx set the wireless client s to use the same wireless settings as the P 660HWP Dx You must also activate and start OTIST on the wireless client s all within three minutes 7 5 1 2 Wireless Client Start the ZyXEL utility and click the Adapter tab Select the OTIST check box enter the same Setup Key as your AP s and click Save P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 69 Example Wireless Client OTIST Screen a Link Info Site Survey ot dapter Profile OE Transfer Rate Fully Auto z gt Preamble Type Auto xi Power Saving Mode Continuous Access Mode ed v OTIST One Touch Intelligent Security Technology Setup Key 01234567 Save 7 5 2 Starting OTIST You must click Start in the AP OTIST web configurator screen and in the wireless client s Adapter screen all within three minutes at the time of writing You can start OTIST in the wireless clients and AP in any order but they must all be within range and have OTIST enabled 1 Inthe AP a web configurator screen pops up showing you the security settings to transfer You can use the key in this screen to set up WPA PSK encryption manually for non OTIST devices in the wireless network After reviewing the settings click OK Figure 70 Security Key Microsoft
392. rt enter the port number again in the End Port field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field End Port Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above Server IP Enter the inside IP address of the server here Address Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 7 Address Mapping LES The Address Mapping screen is available only when you select Full Feature in the NAT gt General screen Ordering your rules is important because the P 660HWP Dx applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the P 660HWP Dx takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 9 Network Address Translation NAT rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule
393. rt your P 660HWP Dx 21 1 Firmware Upgrade Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model name with a bin extension for example P 660HWP Dx bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your device Click Maintenance gt Tools to open the Firmware screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your P 660HWP Dx Figure 165 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal device firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from website If the upgrade file is compressed ZIP file you must first extract the binary BIN file In some cases you may need to reconfigure Current Firmware Version V3 40 APD 0 bi 20070129 01 29 2007 File Path Browse Upload The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This is the present Firmware version and the date created Firmware Version File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 21 Tools Table 130 Firmware Upgrade continued
394. rules set up in this wizard are changed in Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup then the service priority radio button will be set to User Configured The Advanced gt Bandwidth MGMT gt Rule Setup screen allows you to edit these rule configurations Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes 5 Follow the on screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup and save your configuration P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard Figure 43 Bandwidth Management Wizard Complete CONGRATULATIONS Press Finish button to close thi d or click the following link to open other pages Return to Wizard Main Page Go to Advanced Setup page P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 4 Bandwidth Management Wizard P 660HWP Dx User s Guide PART II Network WAN Setup 81 LAN Setup 99 Wireless LAN 111 Powerline 135 Network Address Translation NAT 143 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 5 1 WAN Overview A WAN Wide Area Network is an outside connection to another network or the Internet 5 1 1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The P 660HWP Dx supports the following methods 5 1 1 1 ENET ENCAP
395. ry default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the P 660HWP Dx You could simply restore your last configuration 1 4 LEDs The following figure shows the P 660HWP Dx s LEDs P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 1 Introducing the P 660HWP Dx Figure 3 Front Panel The following table describes the LEDs Table 2 Front Panel LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION POWER Green On The P 660HWP Dx is receiving power and functioning properly Blinking The P 660HWP Dx is rebooting or performing diagnostics Red On Power to the P 660HWP Dx is too low Off The system is receiving power but has malfunctioned ETHERNET Green On The P 660HWP Dx has a successful Ethernet connection Blinking The P 660HWP Dx is sending receiving data Off The LAN is not connected WLAN Green On The P 660HWP Dx is ready but is not sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Blinking The P 660HWP Dx is sending receiving data through the wireless LAN Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed DSL Green On The DSL line is up Blinking The P 660HWP Dx is initializing the DSL line Off The DSL line is down INTERNET Green On The Internet connection is up but there is no traffic Blinking The P 660HWP Dx transmitting data on the DSL line Off There is no connection Red On The P 660HWP Dx attempted to connect an
396. s REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate Send a certification request to a certification authority which then issues a certificate Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request SELF represents a self signed certificate SELF represents the default self signed certificate which the P 660HWP Dx uses to sign imported trusted remote host certificates CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 70 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subject This field displays identifying information about the certificate s owner such as CN Common Name OU Organizational Unit or department O Organization or company and C Country It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as a common name organizational unit or department organization or company and country With self signed certificates this is the same information as in the Subject field Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that
397. s Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA PSK WPA2 PSK mode The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Setup Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit more details of your WLAN setup 7 4 4 WPA WPA2 In order to configure and enable WPA WPA2 click the Wireless LAN link under Network to display the General screen Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list Figure 66 Wireless WPA WPA2 Wireless Setup IV Active Wireless LAN Network Name SSID zx amp E Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel 06 2437MHz v Security Security Mode WPA2 wPA Compatible ReAuthentication Timer fisoo In Seconds Idle Timeout 5600 In Seconds Group Key Update Timer fisoo In Seconds Authentication Server IP Address ooo Port Number Rei Shared Secret Eo o Accounting Server optional IP Address foooo Port Number fisi3 Shared Secret wi Apply Cancel Advanced Setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 36 Wireless WPA WPA2 LABEL DESCRIPTION WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2 PSK or WPA2 in the Security
398. s services ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS This is the number of an individual application entry Name This field displays a description given to an application entry Service This field displays either FTP WWW E mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM Qos Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic Priority This field displays the WMM QoS priority for traffic bandwidth Modify Click the to open the Application Priority Configuration screen Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7 8 2 Application Priority Configuration To edit a WMM QoS application entry click the edit icon Bf under Modify The following screen displays Figure 77 Application Priority Configuration Name Service Dest Port Priority Application Priority Configuration E Mail x zs 1965535 Highest Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 43 Application Priority Configuration LABEL DESC
399. s Guide Appendix F Command Interpreter Use the sys logs display log category command to show the logs in an individual P 660HWP Dx log category Use the sys logs clear command to erase all of the P 660HWP Dx s logs Log Command Example This example shows how to set the P 660HWP Dx to record the access logs and alerts and then view the results I r I dE B as gt sys logs load as gt sys logs category access 3 as gt sys logs save as gt sys logs display access time source message 0 06 08 2004 05 58 21 172 21 4 154 LOCK Firewall default policy IGMP W to W 1 06 08 2004 05 58 20 172 21 3 56 LOCK Firewall default policy IGMP W to W 2 06 08 2004 05 58 20 172 21 0 2 LOCK Firewall default policy IGMP W to W 3 06 08 2004 05 58 20 172 21 3 191 LOCK Firewall default policy IGMP W to W 4 06 08 2004 05 58 20 172 21 0 254 LOCK Firewall default policy IGMP W to W 5 06 08 2004 05 58 20 172 21 4 187 137 LOCK Firewall default policy UDP W to W destination 224 0 1 24 239 255 255 250 239 255 255 254 224 0 1 22 224 0 0 1 IV 2621 629925 92137 notes ACC ACCI ACCI ACC ACC ACC ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 37 Appendix F Command Interpreter P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Firewall Commands The following describes the firewall c
400. s a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism via Cl command sys firewall tcprst Table 115 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Generic packet filter matched set d rule d Attempted access matched a configured filter rule denoted by its set and rule number and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 116 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Firewall default policy ICMP ICMP access matched the default policy and was lt Packet Direction gt lt type d gt blocked or forwarded according to the user s setting For lt code d gt type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 Firewall rule NOT match ICMP ICMP access matched or didn t match a firewall rule Packet Direction lt rule d gt denoted by its number and was blocked or forwarded lt type d gt lt code d gt according to the rule For type and code details see Table 127 on page 50 Triangle route packet forwarded The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass ICMP through Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked ICMP corresponding NAT table entry Unsupported out of order ICMP The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets ICMP or the ICMP packets are out of order Router reply I
401. s access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering You can also subscribe to category based content filtering that allows your P 660HWP Dx to check web sites against an external database Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and or to particular computers Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service HTTP or FTP traffic for example from a computer on a network LAN or WAN for example can access the P 660HWP Dx TR 069 Compliance TR 069 is a protocol that defines how your P 660HWP Dx can be managed via a management server such as ZyXEL s Vantage CNM Access The management server can securely manage and update configuration changes in the ZyXEL Device Any IP The Any IP feature allows one computer to connect to the P 660HWP Dx and then to other computers when their IP addresses are in different subnets This is done without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the P 660HWP Dx cannot connect to the Internet thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails
402. s an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 5 6 Configuring More Connections This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote network They are required for placing calls to a remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection When you use the WAN gt Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access you are configuring the first WAN connection Click Network gt WAN gt More Connections to display the screen as shown next Figure 47 More Connections Bor a a a a ON NT CN Internet Connection 8 35 ENET ENCAP 2 v test 0 33 PPPoA B 3 E n 4 E ti 5 B ii 6 B di 7 m ou 8 B ui Apply Cancel P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 More Connections LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the index number of a connection Active This display whether this connection is activated Clear the check box to disable the connection Select the check box to enable it Name This is the descriptive name for this connection
403. s are illegal Table 57 Legal NetBIOS Commands MESSAGE REQUEST POSITIVE VE RETARGET KEEPALIVE All SMTP commands are illegal except for those displayed in the following tables Table 58 Legal SMTP Commands AUTH DATA EHLO ETRN EXPN HELO HELP MAIL NOOP QUIT RCPT RSET SAML SEND SOML TURN VRFY 10 4 2 3 Traceroute Traceroute is a utility used to determine the path a packet takes between two endpoints Sometimes when a packet filter firewall is configured incorrectly an attacker can traceroute the firewall gaining knowledge of the network topology inside the firewall Often many DoS attacks also employ a technique known as IP Spoofing as part of their attack IP Spoofing may be used to break into systems to hide the hacker s identity or to magnify the effect of the DoS attack IP Spoofing is a technique used to gain unauthorized access to computers by tricking a router or firewall into thinking that the communications are coming from within the trusted network To engage in IP spoofing a hacker must modify the packet headers so that it appears that the packets originate from a trusted host and should be allowed through the router or firewall The P 660HWP Dx blocks all IP Spoofing attempts 10 5 Stateful Inspection With stateful inspection fields of the packets are compared to packets that are already known to be trusted For example if you access some outsid
404. s in this screen Table 91 Media Bandwidth Management Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Interface These read only labels represent the physical interfaces Select an interface s check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router through the interface regardless of the traffic s source Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN to LAN traffic to pass through the P 660HWP Dx and be managed by bandwidth management Active Select an interface s check box to enable bandwidth management on that interface Speed kbps Enter the amount of bandwidth for this interface that you want to allocate using bandwidth management The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interface s actual transmission speed For example set the WAN interface speed to 1000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 1 Mbps You can set this number higher than the interface s actual transmission speed This may stop lower priority traffic from being sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth You can also set this number lower than the interface s actual transmission speed If you do not enable Max Bandwidth Usage this will cause the P 660HWP Dx to not use some of the interface s available bandwidth P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management Table 91 Media Bandwidth Management Summary co
405. s sssini a E EAA 178 Table 63 Firewall Configure Customized Services assssessssesssssressssssesrnrnssssesnnnaatinandssessnaatnenaasdtennnaas 179 Table 64 Predefined Serge aikeinaan a aa arai aaa a esas eaaa iwAdio AeA eed 183 Table 55 Firewall uli vented 186 Table OG Frowa TRESSHON scorenu ERR ERE ROH KE HR EE UPS PRI Heb 188 Table GF Content Filer lla M essence eee etd 192 Table 66 Content Filter Schedule 5 etta ir rab epi tia Ed Abr niao dsatiaaiiadesiaabinddenigawis Lot EV Gr RE 193 Table 69 C ntent Filter TRISTE uiua ba DERI ER Hon leet se BiU enr pnd ERE Ln px cS TER nud ed i e HARUM Ferd RE Frida 193 Table 70 Security gt Certificates My Certificates sasseresseieprp E nEFEPEIN n FEE PEUX 3 ee EprEX da EX EPA e EFE REA inis 198 Table 71 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Edit 1 nnne nnne nnnne 200 Table 72 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Details nnn nnnns 200 Table 73 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Create eseeeseeseseeee eee nnn nnns 203 Table 74 Security gt Certificates gt My Certificates gt Import ssssssssssssssee 205 Table 75 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAS sii casnincosaacbiecssedestplevaugarerriaudasehiiiucaceerierensssenexeamniads 206 Table 76 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Details cccccccceeccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeceeeeeeees 208 Table 7
406. s to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e P 660HWP Dx Access and Login Internet Access Powerline Issues 23 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e The P 660HWP Dx does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the P 660HWP Dx is turned on 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the P 660HWP Dx 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the P 660HWP Dx and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on 4 Turn the P 660HWP Dx off and on 5 Ifthe problem continues contact the vendor e One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 1 4 on page 37 Check the hardware connections See the Quick Start Guide Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the P 660HWP Dx off and on If the problem continues contact the vendor ah WD P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 23 Troubleshooting 23 2 P 660HWP Dx Access and Login e forgot the IP address for the P 660HWP Dx 1 The default IP address is 192 168 1 1 2 Ifyou changed the IP address and have forgotten it you might get the IP address of the P 660HWP Dx by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer To do th
407. s your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here Multiplexing Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Refer to the appendix for more information P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 20 Internet Connection continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Obtain an IP Select this if you get a dynamic IP address from your Internet Service Provider Address ISP A dynamic IP address is not fixed your ISP assigns you a different one Automatically each time you connect to the Internet This option is not available if you select RFC 1483 in the Encapsulation field Static IP Address Select this if your ISP gave you a fixed IP address Enter the IP address you were given i
408. screen to view in depth information about the trusted remote host s certificate and or change the certificate s name 52 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Figure 123 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Details Certificate Name auto_generated_self_signed_cert Property Issues certificate revocation lists CRL Certificate Path Certificate Informations Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Self signed X 509 Certificate 3 946684807 CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate rsa pkcsi shal 2000 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT 2030 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT rsaEncryption 512 bits EMAIL factory auto gen cert DigitalSignature KeyEncipherment KeyCertSign Subject Type CA Path Length Constraint 1 8a ba 17 9e 3d 34 95 6e 57 53 bd b3 0a cb d2 62 58 5f 77 4c 0f 98 96 ff 09 45 3e 1c 3d d4 0b 38 36 88 44 ad Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format MIIBoDCCAUqgAvIBAgIEOGiDhzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADAyMTAwuLgYDVOQDEydQ LTYZMEhXUCIEMSBGYUNOD3JSIERlZmFi1bHQgQ2VydGlmaUNhdGUwHhcNHMD AwNTAx MDAwMDAwWhcNMzAwMTAxMDAwMDAwUjAyMTAwLgYDVQODEydQOLTY2 MEhXUCiEMSBG YWNOb3JSIERlZmFi1bHQgO2VydGlmaWUNhdGUwXDANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAANLADBI AkEAn5wlFMUhCSHNaJe3TfNyforBxp62ZD47SKE35CjBl1djwMrBhqXE
409. scription of TR 069 commands Table 105 TR 069 Commands COMMAND OR ROOT SUBDIRECTO COMMAND DESCRIPTION RY wan tr069 All TR 069 related commands must be preceded by wan tr069 load Start configuring TR 069 on your P 660HWP Dx active 0 no Enable disable TR 069 operation 1 yes acsUrl lt URL gt Set the IP address or domain name of CNM Access username Username used to authenticate the device when making a maxlength 15 connection to CNM Access This username is set up on the server and must be provided by the CNM Access administrator password Password used to authenticate the device when making a maxlength 15 connection to CNM Access This password is set up on the server and must be provided by the CNM Access administrator periodicEnable Whether or not the device must periodically send information to 0 Disable CNM Access It is recommended to set this value to 1 in order for l Enable the P 660HWP Dx to send information to CNM Access informInterval The duration in seconds of the interval for which the device MUST sec attempt to connect with CNM Access to send information and check for configuration updates Enter a value between 30 and 2147483647 seconds save Save the TR 069 settings to your P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Universal Plug and Play UPnP This chapter introdu
410. sies sass ssandiucaesdadiniandseedassseessinscaasdiansevensaccanasareedaennts 101 6 2 2 RIR SEM ta sre dace ea saan ames Cet dida ed osha ena aa pa DE Ut pM iua cet ira nates I cic n cR 102 edat ro E E E E O E E E E EAE S E E Sada 102 CN Ay IP REL 103 Coc om ma EAP aasa 104 6 3 1 Configuring Advanced LAN SQUID scccdessisccntiaessstacnistastccnessesactentaessatinad a 105 wA DHCP dda catenin Na S E D AE AA M 106 CSLAN Chant LIST geirn 107 BS LAN IP AIRS e TRE 108 Chapter 7 MOTUS oq rinn scasecnanicace a E 111 7 1 Wireless Network OvebvteM 1 ecce etri FER ce ERE ERRUII NE EN EECUVER UTE ERR HN GERE PIS nae FED DH ERRARE 111 RECRUIT Mec i deir 112 Ton UI INN si ea pccsartat Le e a edo baad ead Want a Laut HD pU Mord 112 fe d E OFT 2iodcico o dixas cei ti rictus uev A piae n RI MU 112 To VIFBlGSS OBCUHO CEGEPVIBME sses ee SER 39 EAR GSSRE REC ENS ERATAXEN RE RI AXE EXE AA FRA E338 KaL GS GN RUD 113 FAS Es Me TET T AS 113 feo WIRE Address FIEF rr 113 Tce WSOP FUSING ETE LL D T TRUM 114 ECT Mic er e 114 7 3 5 One Touch Intelligent Security Technology OTIST eceeeeeseeceeeeeeennes 115 7A General Wireless LAN SGEN ousesasassoke da DU FOR kd EXER ER ER a RU KE AR aig RR ER AL KERN AK 115 P An ober cg T 117 TAZ NEF EGGP ON aisicn d o en bt maid on en nein gon d ag ean dde bud 117 fu WBA PERNVEARSEO R iini ad aaa aaa aa aa aaa Rex Da Aa aaa i aaa iaaa da 118 CP P E O A E E A A O E E E E O
411. sing among the bandwidth classes that require more bandwidth When you enable maximize bandwidth usage the P 660HWP Dx first makes sure that each bandwidth class gets up to its bandwidth allotment Next the P 660HWP Dx divides up an interface s available bandwidth bandwidth that is unbudgeted or unused by the classes depending on how many bandwidth classes require more bandwidth and on their priority levels When only one class requires more bandwidth the P 660HWP Dx gives extra bandwidth to that class When multiple classes require more bandwidth the P 660HWP Dx gives the highest priority classes the available bandwidth first as much as they require if there is enough available bandwidth and then to lower priority classes if there is still bandwidth available The P 660HWP Dx distributes the available bandwidth equally among classes with the same priority level 15 6 1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non Bandwidth Class Traffic Do the following three steps to configure the P 660HWP Dx to allow bandwidth for traffic that 1s not defined in a bandwidth filter 1 Leave some of the interface s bandwidth unbudgeted 2 Do not enable the interface s Maximize Bandwidth Usage option 3 Do not enable bandwidth borrowing on the child classes that have the root class as their parent see Section 15 9 on page 41 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management 15 6 2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example Here is an example of a P 6
412. sk Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 158 Two Subnets Example IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C To make two networks divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix E IP Subnetting BS In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits borrowed to make network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet Table 159 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER TA ET at IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000
413. ss address P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup Table 97 Dynamic DNS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Dynamic DNS Select this option only when there are one or more NAT routers between the P server auto 660HWP Dx and the DDNS server This feature has the DDNS server detect IP automatically detect and use the IP address of the NAT router that has a public IP Address address Note The DDNS server may not be able to detect the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the P 660HWP Dx and the DDNS server Use specified IP Type the IP address of the host name s Use this if you have a static IP address Address Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 16 Dynamic DNS Setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Remote Management Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring remote management 17 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which P 660HWP Dx interface if any from which computers LES When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access You may manage your P 660HWP Dx from a remote location via Internet WAN only ALL LAN and WAN LAN
414. ss of your P 660HWP Dx in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Advanced Setup Click this button to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup 6 3 1 Configuring Advanced LAN Setup To edit your P 660HWP Dx s advanced LAN settings click the Advanced Setup button in the LAN IP screen The screen appears as shown Figure 56 Advanced LAN Setup RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Both v RIP Version RIP 1 Multicast iewp vi Any IP Setup IV Active Windows Networking NetBIOS over TCP IP IV Allow between LAN and WAN Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION RIP amp Multicast Setup RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The P 660HWP Dx supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it Any IP Setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide
415. ss security methods available on your P 660HWP Dx Table 140 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL SECURITY TYPE Least Unique SSID Default Secure Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802 1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi Fi Protected Access WPA Most Secure WPA2 You must enable the same wireless security settings on the P 660HWP Dx and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it IEEE 802 1x In June 2001 the IEEE 802 1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802 11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices Some advantages of IEEE 802 1x are User based identification that allows for roaming Support for RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server Support for EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol RFC 2486 that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client server model that supports authentication authorization and accounting The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server The RADIUS server handles the following tasks Authentication Dete
416. sts out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the P 660HWP Dx 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access the Internet it sends packets to its default gateway which is not the P 660HWP Dx by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN The P 660HWP Dx receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the P 660HWP Dx When the P 660HWP Dx receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the P 660HWP Dx and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the P 660HWP Dx 6 3 Configuring LAN IP Click LAN to open the IP screen See Section 6 1 on page 35 for background information Figure 55 LAN IP LAN TCP IP IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Cancel Advanced Setup P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 6 LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 26 LAN IP LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN TCP IP IP Address Enter the IP addre
417. syslog server 20 1 1 Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention They include system errors attacks access control and attempted access to blocked web sites Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen Alerts display in red and logs display in black 20 2 Viewing the Logs Click Maintenance gt Logs to open the View Log screen Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen see Section 20 3 on page 36 Log entries in red indicate alerts The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 20 Logs Figure 162 View Log View Logs Display All Logs 7 Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log 01 01 2000 00 33 40 01 01 2000 j ACCESS 00 31 32 none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1197 PERMITTED 01 01 2000 p ACCESS ripis none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1196 PERMITTED 01 01 2000 ACCESS 00 31 32 none UDP 192 168 1 1 53 192 168 1 34 1195 PERMITTED 01 01 2000 00 30 23 WEB Login Successfully User admin WEB Login Successfully User user The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 109 View Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Display The
418. t Other Places J Control Panel My Network Places Lj My Documents ij My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 Anicon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your P 660HWP Dx and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 158 Network Connections My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ee c 27 Search m Folders E Address 9 My Network Places Network Tasks a Add a network place view network connections Set up a home or small office network gif View workgroup computers Other Places Local Network ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gate Invoke Create Shortcut Rename Properties 6 Right click on the icon for your P 660HWP Dx and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the P 560HWP Dx Figure 159 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway General m Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer ZyXEL Model Name ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number 660 Desctiption Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address http 192 168 1 1 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 57 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP
419. t Any End IP ooo address 0 0 0 0 Edit Subnet Mask 0 0 0 6 Delete Service Available Services Add gt gt AIMINEACICO TCP 5190 AUTH TCP 113 BGP TCP 179 xl Edit Customized Services Schedule Day to Apply iv Everyday M sun V Mon I Tue IV wed IV Thu M rri IV sat Time of Day to Apply 24 Hour Format M All day stando hour minute Endjo hour minute Log rH Log Packet Detail Information Alert Send Alert Message to Administrator When Matched Cancel Selected Services P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Firewall Edit Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this firewall rule Action for Matched Packet Use the drop down list box to select what the firewall is to do with packets that match this rule Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message to the sender Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet for a TCP packet or an ICMP destination unreachable message for a UDP packet to the sender Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets Source Destination Address Address Type Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular single IP a range of IP addresses e g 192 168 1 10 to 192 169 1 50 a sub
420. t DHCP Client Table IP Address 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Add Be Rea IP Address MAC Address USER igi tw11947 192 168 1 33 00 00 E8 7C 14 80 C 2 g 192 168 1 35 00 AC 10 01 23 45 v 3 y 192 168 1 64 00 A0 C5 01 23 46 iv EP Apply Cancel Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 LAN Client List LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address specified below The IP address should be within the range of IP addresses you specified in the DHCP Setup for the DHCP client MAC Address Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN Add Click Add to add a static DHCP entry This is the index number of the static IP table entry row Status This field displays whether the client is connected to the P 660HWP Dx Host Name This field displays the computer host name IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the field listed above MAC Address The MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address on a LAN Local Area Network is unique to your computer six pairs of hexadecimal notation A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address Reserve Select the check box es in each entry to have the P 660HWP
421. t Power Management This allows you to alter the level of power used by the P 660HWP Dx For example when access points are placed closely together power output levels may be reduced Wireless LAN MAC Address Filtering This service checks the MAC address of a connection with a list of allowed or denied MAC addresses ensuring only wanted connections are allowed The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the P 660HWP Dx Table 138 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1332 The PPP Internet Protocol Control Protocol IPCP RFC 1334 PPP Authentication Protocol PAP RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator NAT RFC 1661 The Point to Point Protocol PPP RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1994 PPP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2364 PPP over AAL5 PPP over ATM over ADSL RFC 2408 Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol ISAK
422. t Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing 42 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 119 UPnP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall Table 120 Content Filtering Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s Keyword blocking The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword s Not in trusted web The web site is not in a trusted domain and the router blocks all traffic list except trusted domain sites s Forbidden Web site The web site is in the forbidden web site list s Contains ActiveX The web site contains Activex s Contains Java The web site contains a Java applet applet s Contains cookie The web site contains a cookie 3 Proxy mode The router detected proxy mode in the packet detected SS The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list but it did not return the category type s s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list and returned the category type s cache hit The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache but does not know the category type oo s 3s cache hit The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache and knows the category type oo S Trusted Web site Th
423. t mode and encapsulation type you use All screens shown are with routing mode Configure the fields and click Next to continue Figure 26 Internet Connection with PPPoE fi Internet Configuration User Name Password Service Name Note given to you by your Internet Service Provider here If it in the third field foptional Device is automatically configured to obtain an IP address automatically The ISP will assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet lt Back Aen et P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 9 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here Back Click Back to go back to the previous wizard screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving your changes Figure 27 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 fa Internet Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Internet Connection with RFC 1483
424. tabe RONTE sinisiipien erepto E eta i Leod Id SOR 219 122 1 DE ROG EOT Lagdeseszodded cibx uan PORTU OUS ces Sade dica eiat aqux NENTE ONA Gl td E ante 220 Chapter 15 Bandwidth MarnsgelTielit uo vs canta env xe PE FEn NU IRSE Se NEP NX VA FESUO Sene ecu Sas So SU ERa 223 15 1 Bandwidth Management OVGOIVIGW iuueni iiic ementi ta tmu aiit tomus Scu asn 223 15 2 Application based Bandwidth Management ssssssssssssssseseeeeneeene 223 15 3 Subnet based Bandwidth Management esee enne nnne tn nnne tn nana anna 223 15 4 Application and Subnet based Bandwidth Management ssssssssssssss 224 pero c wl MATT E a a IE aaa meer 224 15 5 1 Piority basod Scheduler 2er eit tante t It Eo ed aur teh iL a n kx PM IEEE OVE 224 155 2 Faress based SohedulBr sorisa E Yo PEE P EO Rente ER Eod ti Hg het a rade 225 135 ESrm As psspcuR4 o qWe M 225 15 6 1 Reserving Bandwidth for Non Bandwidth Class Traffic sssessss 225 15 6 2 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Example seseeee emm 226 15 6 3 Bandwidth Management Priorities 5 5 rpdnanREE tpi conn EH adem RPyI RnB E gd a dun be ade dE nannaa 227 12 7 Over Allotment or BandWidth 1i oci citi pe DAR Ip LIS boe ERE a AN bep LE nds 227 e e E E E A A ebd E NE A NA AN E EA 228 15 9 Bandwidth Management Rule Setup c ccceceeciseeeeee cess ceene cesses tenedseesteeneceneeeeneeeeeenenes 229 NIME D P P UR 230 1530 1 DSCP and Per Ho
425. tart guide 43 R RADIUS 316 message types 317 messages 317 shared secret key 317 RADIUS server 114 reboot 293 registration product 387 related documentation 3 remote management and NAT 240 remote management limitations 240 reset 293 reset button 46 resetting the ZyXEL device 46 restart 289 293 restore configuration 292 restore settings 292 RFC 1483 82 RFC 1631 143 RFC 1483 83 RFC 2364 82 RIP 102 Direction 102 Version 102 Routing Information Protocol see RIP RTS Request To Send 314 threshold 313 314 rules 172 checklist 170 key fields 171 LAN to WAN 172 logic 170 predefined services 183 S safety warnings 6 save settings 291 saving the state 162 scheduler 224 fairness based 225 priority based 224 SCR 85 89 94 screws 309 security general 166 ramifications 170 Server 146 server 145 146 268 service 171 service set 116 Service Set IDentity See SSID service type 179 services 148 settings backup 291 defaults 291 restore 292 setup general 265 Single User Account see SUA SIP ALG 146 SIP application layer gateway 146 SMTP 148 smurf 161 SNMP 148 149 243 manager 244 MIBs 244 source address 171 splitters 39 SPTGEN 325 command examples 339 text file format 325 SSID 111 hide 113 stateful inspection 157 158 162 163 and the ZyXEL device 164 process 163 static route 219 SUA 146 SUA vs NAT 146 subnet 307 357 subnet mask 101 177 358 subnetting 358
426. tation that is explained in the next section 7 3 4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that 1s sent in the wireless network Encryption is like a secret code If you do not know the secret code you cannot understand the message The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication See Section 7 3 3 on page 38 for information about this Table 31 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER Weakest No Security WPA Static WEP 1 WPA PSK Strongest WPA2 PSK WPA2 For example if the wireless network has a RADIUS server you can choose WPA or WPA2 If users do not log in to the wireless network you can choose no encryption Static WEP WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK Usually you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports For example suppose the AP does not have a local user database and you do not have a RADIUS server Therefore there is no user authentication Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients Device A only supports WEP and device B supports WEP and WPA Therefore you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA PSK WPA or stronger encryption IEEE 802 1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all but it is sti
427. tch between the router and the peer phase 1 mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 did not match between the router and the peer phase 2 mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 2 did not match between the router and the peer Rule d mismatch Rule d Rule d Rule d mismatch Phase 2 key length The listed rule s IKE phase 2 key lengths with the AES encryption algorithm did not match between the router and the peer P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 124 PKI Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Enrollment successful The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port Enrollment failed The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve lt SCEP CA server url gt The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server s address cannot be resolved Enrollment successful The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Enrollment failed The CMP online certificate enrollment failed The Destination field records the certification authority server s IP address and port Failed to resolve lt CMP
428. ted Click here For more information 6 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 156 Internet Connection Status Y Internet Connection Status fM M General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer ws j 2 Packets Sent 8 Received 5 943 18 4 2 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the P 660HWP Dx without finding out the IP address of the P 660HWP Dx first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the P 660HWP Dx Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 55 Chapter 18 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Figure 157 Network Connections s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Qe 2 yo Search Folders Ea Address Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection 5 Create a new connection 9 Set up a home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet See Also d Local Area Connection Network Troubleshooter Enabled E a Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fas
429. ter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 4 Status Screen continued LABEL DESCRIPTION CPU Usage This number shows how many kilobytes of the heap memory the P 660HWP Dx is using Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System and is thus available for running processes like NAT VPN and the firewall The bar displays what percent of the P G60HWP Dx s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached Memory Usage This number shows the P 660HWP Dx s total heap memory in kilobytes The bar displays what percent of the P G60HWP Dx s heap memory is in use The bar turns from green to red when the maximum is being approached Interface Status Interface This displays the P 6860HWP Dx port types Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation Rate For the LAN ports this displays the port speed and duplex setting Ethernet port connections can be in half duplex or full duplex mode Full duplex refers to a device s ability to send and receive simultaneously while half duplex indicates that traffic can flow in only one direction at a time The Ethernet port must use t
430. tered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct the screen displays as shown next Click Back to Username and Password setup to go back to the screen where you can modify them Figure 30 Connection Test Failed 1 STEP 1 gt gt STEP 2 fii Internet Configuration Your login username and pa rd are wrong Back to Username and Password setup Ifthe following screen displays check if your account is activated or click Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard to verify your Internet access settings 42 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 31 Connection Test Failed 2 fii Internet Configuration your I Ih Restart the Internet Wireless Setup Wizard 3 3 Wireless Connection Wizard Setup After you configure the Internet access information use the following screens to set up your wireless LAN This section is available on the wireless devices only 1 Select Yes and click Next to configure wireless settings Otherwise select No and skip to Step 6 Figure 32 Connection Test Successful STEP STEP fii Internet Configuration Continue to Wireless Setup wizard Yes No 2 Use this screen to activate the wireless LAN and OTIST Click Next to continue P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for Internet Wireless Access Figure 33 Wireless LAN Setup Wizard 1 STEP 1 STEP 2 f
431. ters are 0 9 and a f In the case of the P 660HWP Dx this label is on the bottom of the device P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 8 Powerline LABEL DESCRIPTION TEI TEI refers to Terminal Equipment Identifier In this case the number identifies the CCo on the powerline network NID NID refers to Network Identifier This number identifies a network with a common password SNID SNID refers to Short Network Identifier This number is a short form of the NID Local Station This section gives information on the adapter your P 660HWP Dx Information you are using to access the powerline network MAC Address This is the MAC address of the Local Station You can find the MAC address of an adapter displayed on a sticker on the bottom of your device CCo Mode The CCo mode can be Auto Automatic Always or Never These modes are read only and cannot be changed by the user TEI TEI refers to Terminal Equipment Identifier In this case the number identifies the P 660HWP Dx on the powerline network MAC Firmware Version This information includes the chipset manufacturer and version number of the chip Topology in Local Network This section describes the organization of your powerline network TEI This number identifies one of the adapters on your powerline network Station MAC Address This is the MAC address of an adapter on your powerline network
432. the DSCP mapping Figure 132 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP Unused 6 bit 2 bit The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management PHB consists of two types of services EF Expedited Forwarding and AF Assured Forwarding EF has higher priority EF guarantees services with minimal loss and delay AF has four sub classes each with three levels of importance drop precedence A high drop precedence means low importance Table 93 Sub Classes of AF Services DIFFSERV PRIORITY PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE SUB CLASS4 AF41 AF42 AF43 SUB CLASS3 AF31 AF32 AF33 SUB CLASS2 AF21 AF22 AF23 SUB CLASS1 AF11 AF12 AF13 15 10 2 Rule Configuration Click the Edit icon or select User Defined from the Service drop down list in the Rule Setup screen to configure a bandwidth management rule Use bandwidth rules to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity bandwidth budgets to specific applications and or subnets Figure 133 Bandwidth Management Rule Configuration Rule Configuration M Active Rule Name BW Budget Priority
433. the P 660HWP Dx will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the P 660HWP Dx will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the P 660HWP Dx sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 6 2 3 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version 1 RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address
434. the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Modify Click the details icon to open a screen with an in depth list of information about the certificate or certification request Click the export icon to save the certificate to a computer For a certification request click the export icon and then Save in the File Download screen The Save As screen opens browse to the location that you want to use and click Save Click the delete icon to remove the certificate or certification request A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the certificate You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use Do the following to delete a certificate that shows SELF in the Type field 1 Make sure that no other features such as HTTPS VPN SSH are configured to use the SELF certificate 2 Click the details icon next to another self signed certificate see the description on the Create button if you need to create a self signed certificate 3 Select the Default self signed certificate which signs the imported remote host certificates check box 4 Click Apply to save the changes and return to the My Certificates screen 5 The certificate that originally showed SELF displays SELF and you can delete it now Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this act
435. the end entity s own certificate The P 660HWP Dx does not trust the end entity s certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked Refresh Click Refresh to display the certification path Certificate These read only fields display detailed information about the certificate Information Type This field displays general information about the certificate CA signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate Self signed means that the certificate s owner signed the certificate not a certification authority X 509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU T X 509 recommendation that defines the formats for public key certificates Version This field displays the X 509 version number Serial Number This field displays the certificate s identification number given by the certification authority Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Issuer This field displays identifying information about the certificate s issuing certification authority such as Common Name Organizational Unit Organization and Country With self signed certificates this is the same information as in the Subject Name field Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that
436. the gateway for each logical network By putting your LAN and Gateway B in different subnets all returning network traffic must pass through the P 660HWP Dx to your LAN The following steps describe such a scenario 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN 2 The P 660HWP Dx reroutes the packet to Gateway A which is in Subnet 2 3 The reply from WAN goes through the P 660HWP Dx to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1 Figure 224 IP Alias LAN Subnet 1 WAN Internet Subnet 2 3 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication
437. the tcp max incomplete threshold is exceeded Set it to no to delete the oldest half open session when traffic exceeds the tcp max incomplete threshold config edit firewall attack block minute 0 255 This command sets the number of minutes for new sessions to be blocked when the tcp max incomplete threshold is reached This command is only valid when block is set to yes P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix G Firewall Commands Table 168 Firewall Commands continued FUNCTION COMMAND DESCRIPTION config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold rate of new minute high lt 0 255 gt half open sessions per minute where the P 660HWP Dx starts deleting old half opened sessions until it gets them down to the minute low threshold config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open minute low lt 0 255 gt sessions where the P 660HWP Dx stops deleting half opened sessions config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open max incomplete high lt 0 255 gt sessions where the P 660HWP Dx starts deleting old half opened sessions until it gets them down to the max incomplete low config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold where the max incomplete low 0 255 P 660HWP Dx stops deleting half opened sessions config edit firewall attack This command sets the threshold of half open tcp max incomplet
438. thority s public key to verify the certificates A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate The P 660HWP Dx does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Chapter 13 Certificates Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL Certificate Revocation List The P 660HWP Dx can check a peer s certificate against a directory server s list of revoked certificates The framework of servers software procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI public key infrastructure 13 1 1 Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits The P 660HWP Dx only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust no matter how many devices you need to authenticate Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys 13 2 Self signed Certificates You can have the P 660HWP Dx act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates 13 3 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted CA or trusted remote host certificate into the P 660HWP Dx you should verify that you have the actual certific
439. tificate signed by a trusted certification authority as being trustworthy P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 51 Chapter 13 Certificates LES The trusted remote host certificate must be a self signed certificate and you must remove any spaces from its filename before you can import it Figure 122 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Import Certificates Trusted Remote Hosts Import Please specify the location of the certificate file to be imported The certificate file must be in one of the following formats Binary X 509 PEM Base 64 encoded X 509 Binary PKCS 7 PEM Base 64 encoded PKCS 7 File Path Browse Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Import LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload Back Click Back to go the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the certificate on the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Remote Hosts screen 13 14 Trusted Remote Host Certificate Details Click Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts to open the Trusted Remote Hosts screen Click the details icon to open the Trusted Remote Host Details screen You can use this
440. tificate issued by the certification authority Figure 119 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Details Certificate Name Property Certificate Path auto_generated_self_signed_cert H Issues certificate revocation lists CRL Searching Certificate Informations Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Signature Algorithm Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format Self signed X 509 Certificate v3 946684807 CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate CN P 660HWP D1 Factory Default Certificate rsa pkcs1 shal 2000 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT 2030 Jan 1st 00 00 00 GMT rsaEncryption 512 bits EMAIL factory auto gen cert DigitalSignature KeyEncipherment KeyCertSign Subject Type CA Path Length Constraint 1 8a ba 17 9e 3d 34 95 6e 57 53 bd b3 0a cb d2 62 58 5f 77 4c 0f 98 96 ff 09 45 3e 1c 3d d4 0b 38 36 88 44 ad IIBODCCAUqgAwIBAgIEOGiDhzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADAyMTAwLgYDVOQDEydO LTY2MEhXUCiEMSBGYUNOb3JSIERlZrmFi1bHQgQ2VydGlmaUNhdGUwHhcNHDAwMTAx ND AwMD AvUhcNHMz AuMTAxMD AuMD AuU j AyHTAvLgYDVOQDEydOLTY2 MEhXUC1EMSBG YUNDb3JSIERlZmF1bHQgQ2VydGlmaUNhdGUwXDANBgkqhkiGS9wOBAQEF AANLADBI AkEAn5SwlFMUhCSHNaJe3TfNyforBxp6ZD47SKE35CjBidjwMrBhgXEkXUUutX711 INok8PB6x7p1iZ 10Axaf USMAr OID AQABOOgwRj AOBGNVHOSBAQAEBAMCAqOwIAYD IVRORBBkwF 4EVZnF jdG9 ye UBhdXRv
441. tification Authority that signed the certificate X 509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU T X 509 recommendation that defines the formats for public key certificates Version This field displays the X 509 version number Serial Number This field displays the certificate s identification number given by the device that created the certificate P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 80 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted Remote Hosts gt Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subject This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate such as Common Name CN Organizational Unit OU Organization O and Country C Issuer This field displays identifying information about the default self signed certificate on the P 660HWP Dx that the P 660HWP Dx uses to sign the trusted remote host certificates Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that the P 660HWP Dx used to sign the certificate which is rsa pkcs1 sha1 RSA public private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red a
442. tion is not allowed Cannot resolve Secure Gateway Addr for rule d The router couldn t resolve the IP address from the domain name that was used for the secure gateway address Peer ID peer id My remote type My local type The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection vs My Remot My remote My remote The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection vs My Local My local My local The displayed ID information did not match between the two ends of the connection Send packet A packet was sent P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 20 Logs Table 123 IKE Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Recv packet IKE uses ISAKMP to transmit data Each ISAKMP packet contains many different types of payloads All of them show in the LOG Refer to RFC2408 ISAKMP for a list of all ISAKMP payload types Recv Mode Main or Aggressive request from IP The router received an IKE negotiation request from the peer address specified Send Mode Main or Aggressive request to IP The router started negotiation with the peer Invalid IP Peer local Peer local The peer s Local IP Address is invalid Remot IP Remot IP Remote IP conflicts The security gateway is set to 0 0 0 0 and the router us
443. tion protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP UDP 7648 24032 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software DNS UDP TCP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names e g www zyxel com to IP numbers FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 21 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IPSEC_TUNNEL AH 0 The IPSEC AH Authentication Header tunneling protocol uses this service IPSEC_TUNNEL ESP 0 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol MULTICAST IGMP 0 Internet Group
444. to MDI MDI X 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports Operation Temperature 0 C 40 C Storage Temperature 20 60 C Operation Humidity 20 85 RH Storage Humidity 10 90 RH Distance between the 215 5 mm centers of the holes for wall mounting on the device s back Screw size for wall M4 Tap Screw mounting Antenna The P 660HWP Dx is equipped with one 3dBi detachable antenna Table 136 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Default Admin Password 1234 Default User Password user DHCP Pool 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the P 660HWP Dx P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall Mounting Table 136 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the P 660HWP Dx Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the P 660HWP Dx s configuration You can put it back on the P 660HWP Dx later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration Network Address Translation NAT Each computer on your network must have its own uniqu
445. traint This field displays general information about the certificate For example Subject Type CA means that this is a certification authority s certificate and Path Length Constraint 1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificate s path CRL Distribution Points This field displays how many directory servers with Lists of revoked certificates the issuing certification authority of this certificate makes available This field also displays the domain names or IP addresses of the servers MD5 Fingerprint This is the certificate s message digest that the P 660HWP Dx calculated using the MD5 algorithm You can use this value to verify with the certification authority over the phone for example that this is actually their certificate SHA1 Fingerprint This is the certificate s message digest that the P 660HWP Dx calculated using the SHA algorithm You can use this value to verify with the certification authority over the phone for example that this is actually their certificate Certificate in PEM Base 64 Encoded Format This read only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM format PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form You can copy and paste the certificate into an e mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file o
446. ty of this rule Bandwidth kbps This is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kbps Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule Click the Remove icon to delete an existing rule Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 10 DiffServ DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 15 10 14 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with
447. type exactly 5 13 or 29 characters or Please type exactly 10 26 or 58 characters using only the numbers 0 9 and the letters a f or A F Apply Cancel Advanced Setup The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen Table 34 Wireless Static WEP Encryption LABEL DESCRIPTION Security Mode Choose Static WEP from the drop down list box Passphrase Enter a Passphrase up to 32 printable characters and clicking Generate The P 660HWP Dx automatically generates a WEP key WEP Key The WEP keys are used to encrypt data Both the P 660HWP Dx and the wireless clients must use the same WEP key for data transmission If you want to manually set the WEP key enter any 5 13 or 29 characters English keyboard string or 10 26 or 58 hexadecimal characters 0 9 A F for a 64 bit 128 bit or 256 bit WEP key respectively Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the P 660HWP Dx Cancel Click Cancel to reload the previous configuration for this screen Advanced Click Advanced Setup to display the Wireless Advanced Setup screen and edit Setup more details of your WLAN setup 7 4 3 WPA PSK WPA2 PSK In order to configure and enable WPA 2 PSK authentication click Network gt Wireless LAN to display the General screen Select WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK from the Security Mode list P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 65 Wireless WPA PSK WPA2 P
448. ua ak ruS iR upis 342 Figure 190 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address 1 set tek taa sire 343 Figure 191 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration eseeeesseess 344 Figure 192 Windows XI Start MEDU esses pees deeds cea np ern teeta ya end eas Fan ri ati les 345 Figure 193 indous XAF LIORUOI PANEL i hanes cpa Tash a chal Hoc ben ed ef ipei Hobbs c tela 345 Figure 194 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties usuusss 346 Figure 195 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties siscccccccsseessccsssnssetesnesesestesssnisieseeanecsnnanaace 346 Figure 196 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties cccccssscccceeestsncecerestnceecerenneneees 347 Figure 197 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Properes iisisccescssvdccoia deci bk cid ed bia cil nacta ca dba 348 Figure 198 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties ssemm 349 Figure 199 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Men 1 ureiprra err EY3R RE EP Ee IRAM Fe EN ER Pa PII e RPEE RI SEEK ERE ia iE 350 Figure 200 Macintosh OS Sc TEPIP Lus caecisn ded bete EE hates tiu use pe tpe add 350 Figure 201 Macintosh OS x Apple MOI 1s coser bet Eo pee tibta d Eee EUER REN Do bEYER M aeiaai inaaianei SEEK RE Pec etu ties 351 Figure 202 Macintosh Oo X NODWOIK 2 rere peti cidit kk bett tope ed dir kabet ti ko be dde pa bL Lei rada 352 Figure 203 Red Hat 9 0 KDE Network Configuration DEVICES
449. ugs in a TCP IP implementation Those that exploit weaknesses in the TCP IP specification Brute force attacks that flood a network with useless data IP Spoofing Ping of Death and Teardrop attacks exploit bugs in the TCP IP implementations of various computer and host systems a Ff WS KN Ping of Death uses a ping utility to create an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65 536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification The oversize packet 1s then sent to an unsuspecting system Systems may crash hang or reboot Teardrop attack exploits weaknesses in the re assembly of IP packet fragments As data is transmitted through a network IP packets are often broken up into smaller chunks Each fragment looks like the original IP packet except that it contains an offset field that says for instance This fragment is carrying bytes 200 through 400 of the original non fragmented IP packet The Teardrop program creates a series of IP fragments with overlapping offset fields When these fragments are reassembled at the destination some systems will crash hang or reboot 6 Weaknesses in the TCP IP specification leave it open to SYN Flood and LAND attacks These attacks are executed during the handshake that initiates a communication session between two applications Figure 93 Three Way Handshake Client Server ACK COM penes itai Under normal circumstances the application that initiates a session sends a SYN
450. ul Inspection Firewalls unii ricorda eva bo bobus Era dn E FEE EX PX Aie E ente 158 102 intoducton Io ZY AELS Firewall 125 psc Rr dla uode dod dd a deri da o dere 158 10 3 1 Denial ei Service Attacks sususenastuev odit t vie t op E Ee ne beH o tcI R 159 104 Denial f SENICE rr 159 panico o A RP 159 103 2 Tepes Of DOS PMBORS ooa be E dE EPA EEUU eret PE UTIE E FRE pR IUe EE pF IL OP et I Ed UEM 160 TOES SE Edu IS DOE BOE iude due ebd ee aon a getan rd da ee EO pM RO aun 162 10 5 1 Staterul Inspection PROCESS ssania ee preti Leni kernel d phia tena rk kei 163 10 5 2 Statetul Inspection and the P BOOHWULEP DX 2125 tria ti boe cotto sup seceriacsssmeurneses 164 jas ww cc DD I 164 jt MEIRI uA Ec Dis ceria Gem 165 10 5 5 Upper Layer Protocols iiu ded iei o E HIE ERI lae MAIN EIU P ERU TRE a pU i 165 10 6 Guidelines for Enhancing Security with Your Firewall se 166 10C Sing MONTI aS 166 10 7 Packet Filtering Vs Frowa ocsi 167 101 Packe FOr TI T TU TTM 167 1O72 Frewal ee 167 Chapter 11 ilte EeDer pgeiieeee M 169 QURE 6 Jn or M 169 112 Firewall Policies QUBPISAN iisicpmitid ipm e MF pr ER UIS PERRO E 169 11 3 THEO e e 170 BENOIT 1 PENNE MER NER nen eran 170 gem rie ditio e 170 11 3 3 Key Fielde For Configuring RUISG 12 x rrr rp
451. ule d Phase 2 The listed rule s IKE phase 2 authentication algorithm did not authentication algorithm match between the router and the peer mismatch Rule d Phase 2 The listed rule s IKE phase 2 encapsulation did not match encapsulation mismatch between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 2 pfs The listed rule s IKE phase 2 perfect forward secret pfs mismatch setting did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 ID mismatch The listed rule s IKE phase 1 ID did not match between the router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 hash The listed rule s IKE phase 1 hash did not match between the mismatch router and the peer Rule d Phase 1 preshared The listed rule s IKE phase 1 pre shared key did not match key mismatch between the router and the peer Rule d Tunnel built The listed rule s IPSec tunnel has been built successfully successfully Rule d Peer s public key The listed rule s IKE phase 1 peer s public key was not found not found Rule d Verify peer s The listed rule s IKE phase verification of the peer s signature failed signature failed Rule d Sending IKE IKE sent an IKE request for the listed rule request Rule d Receiving IKE IKE received an IKE request for the listed rule request Swap rule to rule d The router changed to using the listed rule Phase 1 key leng The listed rule s IKE phase 1 key length with the AES encryption algorithm did not ma
452. ules 11 3 Rule Logic Overview Study these points carefully before configuring rules 11 3 1 Rule Checklist State the intent of the rule For example This restricts all IRC access from the LAN to the Internet Or This allows a remote Lotus Notes server to synchronize over the Internet to an inside Notes server 1 2 3 4 5 Is the intent of the rule to forward or block traffic What direction of traffic does the rule apply to What IP services will be affected What computers on the LAN are to be affected if any What computers on the Internet will be affected The more specific the better For example if traffic is being allowed from the Internet to the LAN it is better to allow only certain machines on the Internet to access the LAN 11 3 2 Security Ramifications 1 2 Once the logic of the rule has been defined it is critical to consider the security ramifications created by the rule Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet For example if IRC is blocked are there users that require this service P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration 3 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific For example if IRC is blocked for all users will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective 4 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability For example if FTP
453. umber of error packets on this port Tx B s This field displays the number of bytes transmitted in the last second Rx B s This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second Up Time This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up LAN Port Statistics Interface This field displays the type of port Status This field displays Down line is down Up line is up or connected if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Up line is up or connected Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 7 Status Packet Statistics continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Poll Interval s Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above Stop Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics 2 4 8 Changing Login Password It is highly recommended that you periodically change the password for accessing the P 660HWP Dx If you didn t change the default one after you
454. usage 225 Maximum Burst Size see MBS max incomplete high 187 max incomplete low 187 MBS 85 89 94 media access control see MAC Message Integrity Check MIC 320 metric 84 MIB 244 multicast 102 multiplexing 82 LLC based 82 VC based 82 multiprotocol encapsulation 82 N nailed up connection 83 NAT 101 143 148 149 address mapping rule 153 application 144 definitions 143 how it works 144 mapping types 145 mode 147 what it does 144 NAT traversal 251 navigating the web configurator 46 NetBIOS 381 commands 162 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Basic Input Output System see NetBIOS network disconnect icon 290 292 network management 148 NMK changing 136 NNTP 148 O one minute high 187 one minute low 187 P packet filtering 167 when to use 167 packet filtering firewalls 157 Pairwise Master Key PMK 320 321 passwords 138 PCR 84 89 94 Peak Cell Rate see PCR Per Hop Behavior 230 PHB Per Hop Behavior 230 ping 295 ping of death 160 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 82 point to point protocol over ATM Point to Point Tunneling Protocol see PPTP POP3 148 159 power line network scenario 136 power specifications 305 PPPoA 82 PPPoE 81 Benefits 81 PPTP 149 preamble mode 315 Priorities 128 priority 227 230 priority based scheduler 224 private network 136 product registration 387 PSK 320 P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Index Q quick s
455. uses Protocol This field displays the protocol that the directory server uses Modify Click the details icon to open a screen where you can change the information about the directory server Click the delete icon to remove the directory server entry A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the directory server Note that subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action Add Click Add to open a screen where you can configure information about a directory server so that the P 660HWP Dx can access it 13 16 Directory Server Add or Edit Click Security gt Certificates gt Directory Servers to open the Directory Servers screen Click Add or the details icon to open the Directory Server Add screen Use this screen to configure information about a directory server that the P 660HWP Dx can access P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 55 Chapter 13 Certificates Figure 125 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Server gt Add Name Access protocol Server address Server port Login Setting Login Password Certificates Directory Servers Add Directory Service Setting LDAP Host Name or IP Address 389 m m Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Security gt Certificates gt Directory Server gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Directory Service Setting Name Type up to 31 ASCII ch
456. ute LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the number of an individual static route Active Select the check box to activate this static route Otherwise clear the check box Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Subnet Mask This is the IP subnet mask Modify Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the P 660HWP Dx Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the P 660HWP Dx A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route 14 2 1 Static Route Edit Select a static route index number and click Edit The screen shown next appears Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 14 Static Route Figure 128 Static Route Edit Static Route Setup Active Route Name 1 Destination IP Address nono IP Subnet Mask no 00 Gateway IP Address pooo0 Back Apply Cancel i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Static Route Edit LAB
457. ver server Connect to Daytime server The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server fail Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server Too large ICMP packet has The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large been dropped Configuration Change PC The router is saving configuration changes Ox x Task ID Ox x Successful SSH login Someone has logged on to the router s SSH server SSH login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s SSH server Successful HTTPS login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol HTTPS login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol Table 112 System Error Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s exceeds the max This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of session per number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host host setNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter error settings readNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter error settings WAN connection is down A WAN connection is down You cannot access the network through this interface Table 113 Access Control L
458. vice Secured Client IP A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the P 660HWP Dx using this service Select All to allow any computer to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the P 660HWP Dx using this service Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 Configuring FTP You can upload and download the P 660HWP Dx s firmware and configuration files using FTP please see the chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client To change your P 660HWP Dx s FTP settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt FTP tab The screen appears as shown P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration Figure 139 Remote Management FTP FTP FTP Port zx Access Status WAN Y Secured Client IP Al Selected 0 0 0 0 q Note You may also need to create a Firewallrule Cancel L The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Remote Management FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management
459. vides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING ICMP 0 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control channel PPTP TUNNEL GRE 0 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Tr
460. was used to sign the certificate Some certification authorities use rsa pkcs1 sha1 RSA public private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm Other certification authorities may use rsa pkcs1 md5 RSA public private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm Valid From This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid message if the certificate has not yet become applicable Valid To This field displays the date that the certificate expires The text displays in red and includes an Expiring or Expired message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired Key Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificate s key pair the P 560HWP Dx uses RSA encryption and the length of the key set in bits 1024 bits for example P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 13 Certificates Table 76 Security gt Certificates gt Trusted CAs gt Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Subject Alternative Name This field displays the certificate s owner s IP address IP domain name DNS or e mail address EMAIL Key Usage This field displays for what functions the certificate s key can be used For example DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text Basic Cons
461. where you can view and manage the P 660HWP Dx s list of certificates of trusted certification authorities Request When you select Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate Authentication immediately online the certification authority may want you to include a reference number and key to identify you when you send a certification request Fill in both the Reference Number and the Key fields if your certification authority uses CMP enrollment protocol Just fill in the Key field if your certification authority uses the SCEP enrollment protocol Key Type the key that the certification authority gave you Back Click Back to go the previous screen Apply Click Apply to begin certificate or certification request generation Cancel Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen After you click Apply in the My Certificate Create screen you see a screen that tells you the P 660HWP Dx is generating the self signed certificate or certification request After the P 660HWP Dx successfully enrolls a certificate or generates a certification request or a self signed certificate you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificates screen If you configured the My Certificate Create screen to have the P 660HWP Dx enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificate Create sc
462. wise the packets are discarded Table 23 More Connections Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection Name Enter a unique descriptive name of up to 13 English keyboard characters for this connection Mode Select Routing from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices are PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPOE user name above User Name PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the password associated with the Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 5 WAN Setup Table 23 More Connections Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Multiplexing Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC By prior agreement a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 will carry IP If you select VC specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol For LLC based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being co
463. work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 3 on page 46 Co I cannot Telnet to the P 660HWP Dx See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser cannot use FTP to upload download the configuration file cannot use FTP to upload new firmware See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator Ignore the suggestions about your browser 23 3 Internet Access 2 cannot access the Internet P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 7 E Chapter 23 Troubleshooting Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 4 on page 37 If your ISP gave you Internet connection information make sure you entered it correctly in the Network gt WAN gt Internet Connection screen These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP Disconnect all the cables from your device and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again If the problem continues contact your ISP e cannot make Voice over Internet VoIP calls through the P 660HWP Dx O N o A Check your connections Ensure that the
464. work protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP f you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically f you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix D Setting up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 196 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Altemate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 6 Ifyou do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you
465. x User s Guide NetBIOS Filter Commands The following describes the NetBIOS packet filter commands Introduction NetBIOS Network Basic Input Output System are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN For some dial up services such as PPPoE or PPTP NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls You can configure NetBIOS filters to do the following Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN Allow or disallow the sending of NetBIOS packets through VPN connections Allow or disallow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls Display NetBIOS Filter Settings Syntax sys filter netbios disp This command gives a read only list of the current NetBIOS filter modes for The P 660HWP Dx NetBIOS Display Filter Settings Command Example NetBIOS Filter Status Between LAN and WAN Block IPSec Packets Forward Trigger Dial Disabled P 660HWP Dx User s Guide 35 Appendix NetBIOS Filter Commands The filter types and their default settings are as follows Table 169 NetBIOS Filter Default Settings NAME DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE Between LAN This field displays whether NetBIOS packets are blocked or forwarded Block and WAN between the LAN and the WAN IPSec Packets This field displays whether NetBIOS packets sent through a VPN Forward connection are blocked or forwarded
466. xel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www us zyxel com FTP ftp us zyxel com P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Appendix L Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A
467. y 24 Hour Format Select All Day or enter the start and end times in the hour minute format to apply the rule Log Log Packet Detail This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not Go Information to the Log Settings page and select the Access Control logs category to have the P 660HWP Dx record these logs Alert Send Alert Select the check box to have the P 660HWP Dx generate an alert when the rule Message to is matched Administrator When Matched P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Ea Chapter 11 Firewall Configuration Table 61 Firewall Edit Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 11 6 2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the P 660HWP Dx For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority website For further information on these services please read Section 11 8 on page 61 Click the Edit Customized Services link while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port This displays the following screen Refer to Section 10 1 on page 35 for more information Figure 100 Firewall Customized Services S ho deo pa des Kn M foo Io qs Customized Services G Back
468. y to send DNS queries to the P 660HWP Dx Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 8 Configuring ICMP To change your P 660HWP Dx s security settings click Advanced gt Remote MGMT gt ICMP The screen appears as shown If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your P 660HWP Dx an ICMP response packet is automatically returned This allows the outside user to know the P 660HWP Dx exists Your P 660HWP Dx supports anti probing which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent This keeps outsiders from discovering your P 660HWP Dx when unsupported ports are probed P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration Figure 143 Remote Management ICMP ICMP ICMP Respond to Ping on fan amp VAN Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Remote Management ICMP LABEL DESCRIPTION ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet ICMP uses Internet Protocol IP datagrams but the messages are processed by the TCP IP software and directly apparent to the application user Respond to Ping on The P 660HWP Dx will not r
469. y you can set up in the wireless network 7 3 1 SSID Normally the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area You can hide the SSID instead in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID In addition you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess This type of security is fairly weak however because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID In addition unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network 7 3 2 MAC Address Filter Every wireless client has a unique identification number called a MAC address A MAC address 1s usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters for example 00A0C5000002 or 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 To get the MAC address for each wireless client see the appropriate User s Guide or other documentation You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network it still has to have the correct settings SSID channel and security If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network it does not matter if it has the correct settings 1 Some wireless devices such as scanners can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses 2 Hexadecimal characters are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
470. your P 660HWP Dx can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server ACS such as ZyXEL s CNM Access TR 069 is based on sending RPCs Remote Procedure Call between an ACS and a client device RPCs are sent in XML Extensible Markup Language format over HTTP or HTTPS An administrator can use CNM Access to remotely set up the ZyXEL device modify settings perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ZyXEL device All you have to do 1s enable the device to be managed by CNM Access and specify the CNM Access IP address or domain name and username and password P 660HWP Dx User s Guide Chapter 17 Remote Management Configuration Follow the procedure below to configure your P 660HWP Dx to be managed by CNM Access See the Command Interpreter appendix for information on the command structure and how to access the CLI Command Line Interface on the P 660HWP Dx LES In this example a b c d is the IP address of CNM Access You must change this value to reflect your actual management server IP address or domain name See Table 105 on page 45 for detailed descriptions of the commands Figure 144 Enabling TR 069 ras gt wan tr069 load ras gt wan tr069 acsUrl a b c d Auto Configuration Server URL http a b c d ras wan tr069 periodicEnable 1 ras wan tr069 informInterval 2400 TRO69 Informinterval 2400 ras wan tr069 active 1 ras wan tr069 save The following table gives a de
471. ystem General Setup System Setup System Name Domain Name Password User Password New Password Admin Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm AN Caution Administrator Inactivity Timer Retype to confirm m m eo minutes 0 means no timeout m Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 System General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setup System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes It is recommended you enter your computer s Computer name in this field This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Administrator Inactivity Timer Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out The default is 5 minutes After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks A value of 0 means a management session never times out no matter how long it has been left idl

ZyXEL 802.11g User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents